Home
USER`S MANUAL DeviceNet (CompoBus/D
Contents
1. fC mee Dow ew ine 3 Splitting the Power Supply System with Multiple Power Supplies System 1 System 2 Special Power Supply Tap Special Power Supply Tap Remove the fuse and split V fuse V Make V the same for Systems 1 and 2 24V OV 4 Duplex Power Supply with Multiple Power Supplies Special Power Special Power Supply Tap Supply Tap Communications power supply Note 1 If power supply specifications cannot be met with a single power supply when the current ca pacity of the Thick Cable exceeds 8 A even after the power supply location is modified use more than one communications power supply Note 2 In configuration 1 the power can be supplied in two directions to the trunk line as long as the current capacity of each is 8 A or less when using Thick Cable i e it is possible to have a configuration with a total maximum current capacity of up to 16 A 24 DeviceNet Communications Line Design Chapter 2 Note 3 Consider c
2. DeviceNet cables are used M Node T T branch connection M Multi drop connection Node DeviceNet cables 5 wire cables are used for the trunk lines and drop lines 2 1 1 Network Components Nodes There are two kinds of nodes on a DeviceNet Network The Master and Slaves The Slaves connect to external I O and the Master administers the Network and manages the external I O of the Slaves The Master and Slaves can be connected at any location in the Network as shown in the preceding diagram u Trunk Drop Lines The trunk line refers to the cable that has Terminating Resistors on both ends Cables branching from the trunk line are known as drop lines The trunk line length does not necessarily coincide with the maxi mum length of the Network DeviceNet communications are transmitted through 5 wire cables The cables come in thick and thin versions Connection Methods Two methods can be used to connect DeviceNet nodes The T branch method and the multi drop meth od With the T branch method the node is connected to a drop line created with a T branch Tap With the multi drop method the node is directly connected to the trunk line or the drop line Secondary branches can be made from a drop line Both of these connection methods can be used in the same Network Terminat
3. Consider changing the Yes location of the power supply Consider using Thick Cable Are the power supply specifications met Step 2 i Yes Calculate the best location of the actual nodes Are the power supply specifications met lg Consider changing the location of Yes the power supply Consider using Thick Cable Consider changing the location of high current consumption nodes Are the power supply specifications met Step 3 Ro Split the power supply Yes system by installing more than two power supplies Set the location for the power supply Power Supply Location Patterns The power supply can be located in the configurations shown below Basically select from the configu rations 1 and 2 Consider using configuration 3 when power supply specifications cannot be met by configurations 1 and 2 It is possible to use configuration 4 for a duplex power supply 23 DeviceNet Communications Line Design Chapter 2 1 Locating the Nodes on Both Sides of the Power Supply Power Supply Tap or T branch Tap 2 Locating the Nodes on One Side of the Power Supply Note Configuration 1 is recommended for a single power supply to several nodes Power Supply Tap or T branch Tap
4. Z fo Q oO Zz e Qa oO R ien i gt S Left Side Equation Node 1 120 x0 015 3 x 0 005 x 0 1 0 1815 V Node 2 80 x0 015 2 x 0 005 x 0 25 0 3025 V Node 3 40 x0 015 1 x 0 005 x 0 2 0 121 V If 0 1815 0 3025 0 121 0 605 V 4 65 V the conditions are satisfied 28 DeviceNet Communications Line Design Chapter 2 Right Side Calculation Node 4 40 x0 015 1 x 0 005 x 0 15 0 09075 V Node 5 80 x 0 015 2 x 0 005 x 0 25 0 3025 V Node 6 120 x0 015 3 x 0 005 x 0 15 0 27225 V If 0 09075 0 3025 0 27225 0 6655 V 4 65 V the conditions are satisfied 2 3 4 Step 3 Splitting the System into Multiple Power Supplies Go to Step 3 if the best location for the nodes cannot be calculated from the formulae In the third step there are multiple power supplies and the power supply system is split Splitting the Power Supply System e Be sure to use a Power Supply Tap for each power supply when the Network is supplied by two or more power supplies e Remove the fuses in the Power Supply Tap to split the power supply system Once the power supply system is split return to Step 1 or 2 and determine the best location of the nodes in each system Power Supply Tap Configuration Sannector E Model 1485T R2T5 T5 Fuse A Fuse B Specification Power supply tap with a grounding terminal and reverse Power supply cable current prevent
5. Appendix Instance Attribute Produced connection size Content Indicates the maximum number of bytes for transmission Setting range Default Hex Chapter 8 Consumed connection size Indicates the maximum number of bytes for reception Expected packet rate Indicates the length of the internal processing timeout when a communications request is received Watchdog time out action Indicates the action for internal processing timeout related to communications 00 Retain timeout status until reset or cleared 01 Cut connection automatically 02 Operate again with same connection as is Produced connection path length Indicates number of bytes of data for produced connection path Produced connection path Indicates the data for defining the application object for sending this object instance Note Has a function for switching the DeviceNet Communication Card s remote I O operation 62 34 37 Consumed connection path length Indicates the number of bytes of data for the consumed connection path Consumed connection path Indicates the data for defining the application object for receiving this object instance Note Has a function for switching the DeviceNet Communication Card s remote I O operation 62 31 35 Note Reception means output Inverter to SYSMAC PC and transmissio
6. DeviceNet Communications Card Operations Chapter 5 Register No Contents Hex 0038 PID feedback 1 10 100 Input corresponding to max output frequency quantity without sign 0039 PID input quantity 1 10 100 Max output frequency without sign 003A PID output quantity 1 10 100 Max output frequency without sign 003B CPU software number 0080 Control method Frequency reference Output frequency Output current Monitors U1 01 0 01 Hz units units set in 01 03 with sign Monitors U1 02 0 01 Hz units units set in 01 03 with sign Monitors U1 03 Inverters of 7 5 kW or less 0 01 A units Inverters of 11 kW or more 0 1 A units Control method Monitors U1 04 set in A1 02 Motor speed Monitors U1 05 0 01 Hz units units set in 01 03 with sign Output voltage Monitors U1 06 0 1 V units Main circuit DC voltage Monitors U1 07 1 V units Output power Monitors U1 08 0 1 kW units with sign Torque reference Monitors U1 09 0 1 kW units 100 motor s rated torque with sign Input terminal status Monitors U1 10 1 ON Bits 0 to 6 correspond to terminals S1 to S7 Output terminal status Monitors U1 11 Bit O Terminals M1 and M2 1 ON Bit 1 Terminals M3 P1 and M4 PC 1 ON ON Bit 2 Terminals M5 P2 and M6 PC 1 Bits 3 to 6 Not used Bit 7 Terminals MA and MC 1 ON
7. 126 DeviceNet Communications Card Operations Chapter 5 Parameter Register Class 64 Hex Setting Default Change No Hex range unit setting during Instance Attribute operation Motor 2 max output fre 40 0 to 0 1 Hz 50 0 60 0 quency FMAX 400 0 See See note note 5 8 E3 03 031B 03 1B Motor 2 max voltage 0 0 to 0 1 V 200 0 No VMAX 255 0 0 0 400 0 to 510 0 See note See note 1 1 E3 04 031C 03 1C Motor 2 max voltage fre 0 0 to 0 1 Hz 50 0 60 0 No quency FA 400 0 See note 8 E3 05 031D 03 1D Motor 2 mid output fre 0 0 to 0 1 Hz 3 0 No quency 1 FB 400 0 E3 06 031E 03 1E Motor 2 mid output fre 0 0 to 0 1 V 15 0 30 0 No quency voltage 1 VC 255 0 0 0 See note to 510 0 1 and 3 See note 1 E3 07 031F 03 1F Motor 2 min output fre 0 0 to 0 1 Hz 1 5 See No quency FMIN 400 0 note 3 E3 08 0320 03 20 Motor 2 min output fre 0 0 to 0 1 V 9 0 18 0 No quency voltage VMIN 255 0 0 0 See note to 510 0 1 and 3 See note 1 E4 01 0321 03 21 Motor 2 rated current 0 32 to 0 01A Depends No 6 40 See on capac note 2 ity E4 02 0322 03 22 Motor 2 rated slip 0 00 to 0 01 Hz Depends No 20 00 on capac ity E4 03 0323 03 23 Motor 2 no load current 0 00 to 0 01A Depends No 1 89 See on capac note 7 ity
8. 69 DeviceNet System Startup Parameter No Name Operator display Communications external fault input detection method EFO Detection Contents Select the detection method used for the communications external fault input from communications DeviceNet Communications Card 0 Always detect 1 Detect during operation i e when operation commands are input Setting range Default setting Communications external fault input operation EFO Fault Action Select the Inverter operation performed when there is a communications external fault input from communications DeviceNet Communications Card 0 Decelerates to a stop using C1 02 deceleration time fault detection 1 Coats to a stop fault detection 2 Decelerates to a stop using the C1 09 emergency stop time fault detection 3 Continues operating alarm detection Not used Trace Sample Tim Do not set Torque reference torque limit selection from communications Torq Ref Lmt Sel When operating in flux vector control mode this setting enables or disables torque reference and torque limit values input from communications DeviceNet Communications Card See note 1 0 Torque reference torque limit from communications disabled 1 Torque reference torque limit from communications enabled 70 Communications fault operation BUS Fault Sel Select the Inverter operation
9. Slave Slave 3G3FV PDRT1 SINV1 DeviceNet Communications Card 64 nodes max including the Master Unit i i SS Slave Slave Slave Configurator k 64 nodes max including the Master Unit Note 1 The Master Unit and Configurator each occupy one node of the DeviceNet Network Note 2 If C200HS PCs are used only remote I O communications are possible Note 3 The maximum number of nodes that can be connected to the Network will be limited by the maximum number of control points of the PC used 1 4 2 Configurator Overview The Configurator is a software application run on a computer and is used to support a DeviceNet com munications system The Configurator can be connected to the network via a serial communications port using Peripheral Bus or Host Link or it can be connected directly using an interface hardware for connecting computers to the DeviceNet Network The Configurator occupies one node on the Device Net Network but has no specific functions on the network itself The Configurator provides the following functions e Free Allocation of Remote I O The remote I O allocations in the PCs can be changed from the Configurator I O can be flexibly allocated for each node within the specified I O areas e More than One Master Unit per Network Functions and System Configuration Chapter 1 Slaves can be set for each Master Unit from the Configurator enabling
10. Do0go38 0210 000206 MOVD 083 D00009 0012 D00206 MOvD 083 Doo000 0210 D00210 ORW G36 000210 D00001 D00220 BSET 071 0000 bosa00 D93009 Mov 021 0001 0000 Converts command specified in DM Area to CMND data 189 Communications Programs sysMAC CS series PCs 001001 190 Mov o21 Dooo2 000000 Chapter 7 DO1000 Mov o21 000A 001001 MovV oe2 1 0001 D01002 Mov o21 3FFE D01003 MOV 021 0000 001004 MOVv o21 0064 001005 MOV 021 2001 boz000 MOV 021 D00220 Doz2001 MOv 021 D0000S D02002 MOV 021 D00004 D02092 MOVv 021 D00205 D02094 Movio21 D00204 D02095 MOV 021 D00205 D02096 Sets CMND data Mov o21 Do0206 DOo2007 003001 4 C 003000 003000 151100 onco00 Online Flag H CMND 490 A20200 DBoz000 Network Commu D02000 nications Enabled Do1o00 Flag Executes CMND instruction ASL 025 A21900 Network Com oud
11. 003104 000103 CMP 020 0003 Equals Flag P_EQ 003107 ANDW e m D01002 CMP 020 002C D01002 Equals Flag P_EQ 003108 003107 003108 ANDW A D01003 ANDW a D01004 MOV 021 0001 0001 000303 000002 CMP 020 0080 D01005 Equals Flag P_EQ 003109 003109 000003 003110 003110 003110 000004 000001 Communications Programs SYSMAC CS series PCs Chapter 7 000004 MOV 021 0000 0001 MOV 021 0010 D00100 MOV 021 0001 D00101 MOV 021 0000 D00102 XFER 070 0002 D00100 Executes stop command 7 3 2 Reading Parameter Data This programming example is designed to read the parameter data specified in the 3G3RV 3G3PV 3G3FV Inverter To use special remote I O it is necessary to switch the remote I O op eration Refer to 5 2 Switching Remote I O Operation and change to the special remote I O operation Allocation Bit 000000 Read Parameter Input Bit Bit 000002 Faulty Data Reset Input Bit Bit 003000 _ Data Read Flag Bit 003001 Faulty Data Flag Bit 003005 __ Data Read Completed Flag D00000 Register number of the parameter to be read DO0001 Read data 197 Communications Programs SYSMAC Cs series PCs Chapter 7 e Remote I O Allocation Areas I O classification
12. Grounding the DeviceNet Communications Card The DeviceNet Communications Card should be grounded according to DeviceNet recommendations installing a noise filter as shown in the following diagram The ground is normally wired to the ground terminal 12 G 31 DeviceNet Communications Line Design Chapter 2 Note If the cable grounded to the Inverter is not sufficient and is receiving noise interference discon nect the grounding cable a E z AW 2 4 3 Communications Power Supply Noise Prevention The communications power supply is the most important power supply in a DeviceNet Network The following measures will prevent noise in the communications power supply e Use the recommended power supply S82H S82J for communications e Use an independent power supply for communications e Make sure to install a noise filter on the primary AC input side of the communications power supply e Always use a control system power supply for the primary AC side of the communications power sup ply that is not shared with power devices such as Inverters or motors If noise interference remains in cables for which noise countermeasures have been implemented the following countermeasures may be effective e Communications Cable Shielding Suspend the communications cable shielding wire without grounding it This will filter the noise that flows from the ground to the communications cable a
13. e Inputs Inverter to SYSMAC PC Instance ID 70 Dec 46 Hex Byte number Rightmost During forward run Leftmost Rightmost Rotational speed reference rightmost data Leftmost Rotational speed reference leftmost data Note 1 A shaded box indicates that the bit is not used Note 2 The basic remote I O operation is the same as those explained for standard remote I O Ba sic remote I O restricts the operation of standard remote I O Standard Remote I O Standard remote I O is the default setting for the DeviceNet Communications Card e Outputs SYSMAC PC to Inverter Instance ID 21 Dec 15 Hex Byte number Rightmost Net Net Reverse Forward Reference Control stop stop Leftmost Rightmost Rotational speed reference rightmost data Leftmost Rotational speed reference leftmost data e Inputs Inverter to SYSMAC PC Instance ID 71 Dec 47 Hex Byte number Rightmost Reference Control Inverter During During Warning Fault Reference From Net From Net Ready reverse forward minor run run fault Leftmost Rightmost Rotational speed monitor rightmost data Leftmost Rotational speed monitor leftmost data 78 DeviceNet Communications Card Operations Chapter 5 Note A shaded box indicates that the bit is not used Special Remote I O Special remote I O enables using al
14. 2 2 2 Locating Terminating Resistors Be sure to connect the Terminating Resistors at both ends of the trunk line to reduce signal reflection and stabilize communications When there is a T branch Tap 6 m or less from the end of the trunk line or the node A Terminating Resistor attached to a T branch Tap can easily be mounted without taking up much space When there is not a T branch Tap 6 meters or less from the end of the trunk line or the node A Terminating Resistor must be connected before that point Either a T branch Tap mounted to a Terminating Resistor or a terminal block with Terminating Resistor can be used In this case be sure to make the cable length 1 m or less from the node to the Terminating Resistor 1 m or less Truck line T branch Tap mounted to a Terminating Resistor roae or a terminal block with Terminating Resistor Node at end of trunk line 21 DeviceNet Communications Line Design Chapter 2 2 3 Communications Power Supply 2 3 1 Locating the Communications Power Supply Basic Concept e The communications power supply must be 24 VDC e Make sure that the power is supplied from the trunk line e When providing power to several nodes from one power supply if possible try to locate the nodes in both directions from the power supply e Provide power through Power Supply Taps It is however possible to use T branch Taps instead when there is one communications power supply in th
15. Intermediate voltage VC 0 0 to 255 0 0 0 to 510 0 11 0 22 0 See note 2 Minimum frequency FMIN 0 0 to 400 0 0 5 See note 2 163 DeviceNet Communications Card Operations Parameter Register No Hex Class 64 Hex Instance Attribute Setting range Chapter 5 Default setting Changes during operation E1 10 0309 01 63 Minimum voltage 0 0 to 255 0 0 0 0 1 V 2 0 4 0 No VMIN to 510 0 See note 2 E1 11 030A 01 64 Mid output frequency B 0 0 to 400 0 0 1 Hz 0 0 No E1 12 030B 01 65 Mid output frequency 0 0 to 255 0 0 0 0 1V 0 0 No voltage B to 510 0 E1 13 030C 01 66 Base voltage 0 0 to 255 0 0 0 0 1 V 0 0 No to 510 0 E2 01 030E 01 67 Motor rated current 0 32 to 6 40 See 0 01 A 1 90 See No note 4 note 3 E2 02 030F 01 68 Motor rated slip 0 00 to 20 00 0 01 Hz 2 90 See No note 3 E2 03 0310 01 69 Motor no load current 0 00 to 2 90 See 0 01A 1 20 See No note 5 note 3 E2 04 0311 01 6A Number of motor poles 2 to 48 1 4 No E2 05 0312 01 6B Motor phase to phase 0 000 to 65 000 0 001 Q 9 842 No resistance See note 3 E2 06 0313 01 6C Motor leakage 0 0 to 40 0 0 1 18 2 See No inductance note 3 E2 07 0314 01 6D Motor iron core 0 00 to 0 50 0 01 0 50 No saturation coefficient 1 E2 08 0315 01 6E Motor iron core 0 00 to 0 75 0 01 0 75 No
16. Verify the Items 1 to 3 below for each node located in the same direction viewed from the power supply Therefore if nodes are located on both sides of the power supply these items must be verified for all nodes located in each direction 1 Find A the total current consumption of all the nodes to which communications power is to be sup plied 2 Using the graph compute B the maximum current flow in each cable from the power supply to the end of the trunk line according to the types of cables Thick Cables or Thin Cables 26 DeviceNet Communications Line Design Chapter 2 3 Compare the values found in steps 1 and 2 above If the first value A is less than the second B this shows that power supply specifications are met and power can be supplied to all nodes at any point in the Network Note Be sure to refer to the correct graph as the maximum current flow is different for Thick and Thin Cables Countermeasures If the second value B is less than the first A use the following procedure to locate the communica tions power supply e Locate the communications power supply in the center of the Network and the nodes to both sides of it e If the nodes are already located at both sides of the power supply move the power supply in the direc tion that requires the larger current capacity e If Thin Cable is being used replace it with Thick Cable Note If after following the above procedure B is still less than A g
17. connection objects 82 connections methods 18 Control From Net Bit 180 Control Input Write Completed Flag 192 Control Input Write Flag 192 control monitor objects details 107 control remote I O allocated words 88 outputs 79 control supervisor objects 105 106 CPF errors 153 CRC check 11 crimp terminals 42 current capacity 25 D daisy chain drop lines 7 DeviceNet connection objects 105 details 212 service codes 212 DeviceNet objects 105 allocations 210 details 209 service codes 209 drop lines 18 19 branching patterns 19 daisy chain 7 maximum length 11 20 During Forward Run Input Bit 180 During Reverse Run Input Bit 180 E EEPROM 177 Equals Flag 102 CS1 Series 101 221 error codes 158 Error Flag 102 CS1 Series 101 errors communications line 172 explicit messages 175 setup I O Area Overlap 56 T O Area Range Violation 56 special remote I O 176 verification 56 Slave I O Size Differs 56 explicit messages 3 6 errors 175 overview 94 transmission 94 External Fault Input Bit 191 F fault Inverter 177 Fault Bit 181 184 fault codes 108 Fault Flag 180 184 Fault Read Flag 184 Fault Reset Bit 191 Fault Reset Input Bit 180 faults 152 FINS commands 6 187 fixed allocation 8 allocation areas 53 application procedure 57 communications 14 example 57 without Configurator 48 Forward Input Bit 180
18. 0 e Do not set data for unused registers Example 1 In this example the frequency reference is 60 Hz and the minimum setting unit is 0 01 Hz 60 0 01 6000 1770 hex Example 2 In this example 50 minimum setting unit 0 1 is set for the frequency reference voltage terminal 13 input bias 50 0 1 500 01F4 hex oio 011 11 Bit reversal Example 3 In this example 1F hex is set for multi function inputs 1F is transmitted Enabling Parameter Setting Data by Enter Command 1 1 0 0 FEOC hex When setting writing data in parameters be sure to send an enter command After receiving the enter command the Inverter will enable the data newly set in the parameters as operation data When setting writing data in more than one parameter send an enter command once after completing all the settings All the parameters newly set before the enter command is sent will be enabled Data type Enter command written in EEPROM Transmission Function code 10 hex Register No FFFD hex Send data 0000 hex Inverter operation When receiving an enter command a series of parameter setting data will be stored in EEPROM and enabled as operation data Remarks Applicable to all the Inverter software Enter command not written in EEPROM Function code 10 hex Register No FFDD hex Send data 0000 hex When receiving an enter command a ser
19. 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 Mount the Master Unit and wire the Network For CV series PCs Master Units can be mounted to the CPU Rack or Expansion CPU Rack Up to 16 Master Units can be mounted For C200HX HG HE PCs Master Units can be mounted to the CPU Rack or Expansion I O Rack Up to 10 or 16 Master Units can be mounted For C200HS PCs Master Units can be mounted to the CPU Rack or Expansion I O Rack Up to 10 Master Units can be mounted Connect a Programming Device to the PC and turn ON the power supply to the PC Generate the I O table Turn OFF the power to the PC Go to step 8 if only one Master Unit is being used Go to step 15 if more than one Master Unit is being used in the same Network Go to step 29 if allocated DM Area words are used for allocations Connect a Configurator to the Network Turn ON the power supply to all nodes 10 11 12 Switch the PC to PROGRAM mode See note Get the device list and create the master parameters with the Configurator If more than one Master Unit is mounted to the same PC use the Configurator to check for duplica tion in the master parameter settings Register the master parameters in the Master Unit s Go to step 32 Connect a Configurator to the Network Turn ON the power supply to all the Slaves Read the Network configuration from the Configurator See note Turn OFF the power supply to all the Slaves Create th
20. E4 04 0324 03 24 Motor 2 number of poles 2 to 48 1 pole 4 No number of poles E4 05 0325 03 25 Motor 2 line to line resis 0 000 to 0 001 Q Depends No tance 65 000 on capac ity E4 06 0326 03 26 Motor 2 leak inductance 0 0 to 40 0 0 1 Depends No on capac ity E4 07 0327 03 27 Motor 2 rated capacity 0 40 to 0 01 kW Depends No 650 00 on capac ity Note 1 Values in parentheses are for 400 V class Inverters Note 2 The setting range is 10 to 200 of the Inverter s rated output current The values for a 200 V class 0 4 kW Inverter are given above Note 3 When the control mode is changed the Inverter will revert to default settings The V f control default settings are given above Note 4 E1 13 will be the same value as E1 05 after autotuning Note 5 The upper setting limit will be 150 0 Hz when C6 01 is set to 0 Note 6 The settings of E1 11 and E1 12 are ignored if set to 0 0 Note 7 If multi function input H1 is set to 16 motor 2 the default setting will depend upon the Inverter capacity The value for a 200 V class 0 4 kW Inverter is given Note 8 Values in parentheses are for Asian model Inverters 127 DeviceNet Communications Card Operations Option Parameters Chapter 5 Parameter Register Class 64 Hex Name Setting Setting Default Change No Hex range unit setting during Instance Attribute operat
21. Note 1 The above example is for a CS CJ series PC using the Configurator Note 2 When using allocated DM Area words output block 2 and input block 2 cannot be set Also it is not possible to allocate only the leftmost byte of a word as with node address 01 in the above example Basic Application Procedure 1 62 Set the initial settings for the Master Unit CS1W DRM21 or CJ1W DRM21 Unit number UNIT No switch on front panel Node address node address switches on front panel Baud rate front panel DIP switch pins 1 and 2 Communications continue stop setting for communications error front panel DIP switch pin 3 Hold clear remote output setting for communications error front panel DIP switch pin 4 CVM1 DRM21 V1 Unit number UNIT No switch on front panel Node address back panel DIP switch pins 1 to 6 Baud rate front panel DIP switch pins 1 and 2 Communications continue stop setting for communications error front panel switch pin 3 C200HW DRM21 V1 Unit number MACHINE No switch on front panel Node address back panel DIP switch pins 1 to 6 Baud rate front panel DIP switch pins 1 and 2 Communications continue stop setting for communications error front panel switch pin 3 Set the initial settings for the Slaves Node address DIP switch Baud rate DIP switch Etc DeviceNet System Startup Chapter 4 3 NOOO A 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
22. Rotational speed monitor leftmost bits Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Rotational speed monitor rightmost bits Bit 0 Not used Net Reference Net Control Not used Not used Fault Reset Reverse stop Forward stop 0 b1 01 1 DeviceNet See note 1 0 b1 02 1 DeviceNet See note 2 0 1 Fault Reset 0 Stop 1 Reverse 0 Stop 1 Forward Note 1 Net Reference is used to specify the frequency reference as follows cannot be changed dur Note 2 ing running 0 The frequency reference input method specified by the frequency reference source selec tion b1 01 is used 1 Set b1 01 to 3 and operate via DeviceNet Operate with rotational speed reference in word n 1 Net Control is used to change the run command as follows cannot be changed during run ning 0 The run command input method specified by the run command source selection b1 02 is used 1 Set b1 02 to 3 and operate via DeviceNet Follow run command in word n bits O and 1 e Inverter Status Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 At Reference Reference From Net Control From Net Inverter Ready During reverse run During forward run Warning Minor Fault Fault 0 Accelerating or Decelerating 1 At reference 0 b1 01 1 DeviceNet See note 1 0 b1 02 1 DeviceNet
23. Terminal Block 4 42 34 2 d0 taciotc be Bas tod ee Vase edad eet 36 3 1 3 Operation Indicators 0 cece eee ee 37 3 1 4 Baud Rate and Node Address Settings 0 000 000 cee eee 38 3 2 Installation and Wiring ocs 8 66 ds ea 4 eas Gk aoe Seley a deacons aus Shots OE S 39 3 2 1 DeviceNet Communications Card Installation 00 40 3 2 2 Communications Cable Wiring 00 0 0 eee eee eee 41 CHAPTER 4 DeviceNet System Startup e cceeeeeee 47 4 1 SYSMAC Word Allocations and Scan List nannu aanne eens 48 4 1 1 Overview and Restrictions of Word Allocations 0 0c eeeeee 48 Anl Scam Eist haeata ee ase 4 heck odo age pine sede wate els Be RG tte law eaen aa 51 4 1 3 Fixed Word Allocations 0 0 000 e enn ees 53 4 1 4 Free Allocations 0 0 cc ce cence nee e ence neeees 59 4 2 SYSDRIVE Inverter Settings 0 00 a ar cee eee ee 65 4 2 1 3G3RV and 3G3PV Inverters 0 0 0 ete eee ne ees 65 Vii Table of contents 4 2 2 3BGBEV Inverters essi a aa dais ts er eee ib ea eA A GSES Vata wees Sete 68 4 3 Stattup Procedures ssc yp as tan ee ees gage oe wb OEE oe GEO BER OE A wees 72 CHAPTER 5 DeviceNet Communications Card Operations 73 Dal VREMOLE OMe s5 0s nae east pads seated Speed baker tian ete ete dls acct E aa 74 5 1 1 Standard Remote I O Initial Setting 0 0 cee eee ee eee 75 5 1 2 Types of Remote I
24. such as CMND and IOWR depending on the model of SYSMAC PC used from the program in the CPU Unit Allows some parameter setting and monitoring Inverter output frequency output voltage or output current If the remote I O communications is not performed Inverter control data such as RUN or STOP can be input through this message communications function Remote I O communications for the DeviceNet Communications Card are performed using either 4 or 8 words allocated in the I O Area of the SYSMAC PC The Inverter can be controlled using remote I O communications because the basic control I O functions frequency setting functions and output fre quency monitoring functions are assigned to remote I O The allows the Inverter to be controlled through simple I O processing Communications with SYSMAC CS CJ series C200HX HG HE and CV series PCs The DeviceNet communications system is supported by both SYSMAC CS Cu series C200HX HG HE and CV series Programmable Controllers Up to twice as many Inverters can be connected in com parison to SYSMAC BUS Remote I O Systems to support even larger control systems 2 Functions and System Configuration Chapter 1 Note 1 The maximum number of nodes that can be connected to the system depends on the type of Master Unit used whether the message function is used and the number of words used by remote I O communications See 1 4 DeviceNet System Configuration for further details Note 2 The
25. word m bit 3 n a aan A 001003 001003 001002 i See note 001004 001004 001004 Net control word n bit 5 Net reference word n bit 6 000000 MOV 021 Speed reference setting D00000 n 1 Reverse Operation 000001 word m bit 3 003000 Forward Stop Bit word n bit 0 Forward Operation d m bit 2 000002 word m bit 2 003000 Reverse Stop Bit word n bit 1 Fault Bit word m bit 0 000003 Fault Flag 003000 003000 000003 Fault Reset Input Bit word n bit 2 Note This program is not required if the b1 01 Frequency Reference Selection is set to 3 and b1 02 Inverter Operation Command Selection is set to 3 182 Communications Programs SYSMAC Cs series PCs Chapter 7 7 2 Message Communications Programming 7 2 1 Inverter Fault Processing The message communications programming example given here reads and stores the fault data using explicit messages for fault outputs from the Inverter If the Inverter has a fault the remote I O input s Fault Bit word m bit 0 will turn ON Be sure to turn OFF the Run Command Bits word n bits 0 and 1 In this program example the fault code is stored in D00200 If commands are interrupted by faults store the completion code in the DM Area and re execute the command When a fault occurs check the contents of the fault and take countermeasures referring to information provided in the SYSDRIVE Inverter User s Manual 3G3RV 15
26. 000001 munications Error Flag LE l ASR 026 Z A21900 Network Com 0000 A20200 munications Error Flag Network H ASL 025 Commu p000 nications Enabled p Flag Confirms execution of CMND instruction 151100 gcaoo2 Online Flag HK CMP 020 A20200 0000 Network Com 003001 munications En abled Flag 1 Movio21 Equals Flag D03001 P_EQ D00100 ASR 026 0000 ASR 026 0000 MOV 021 Equals Flag 0000 P_EQ 0000 N koa 002001 Communications Programs SYSMAC Cs series PCs Chapter 7 7 3 Special Remote I O Programs 7 3 1 Simple Operation Programs This section describes examples of simple operation programming using special remote I O for a 3G3RV Inverter To use special remote I O it is necessary to switch the remote I O operation Refer to 5 2 Switching Remote I O Operation and change to the special remote I O operation Once the Program Start Input Bit is turned ON Inverter operations will continue until the Program End Input is turned ON The frequency speed reference specified in the DM Area D01000 of the PC is repeatedly set in the Inverter The output frequency value will be repeatedly read and stored in the DM Area D02000 The Inverter status will also be read repeatedly and stored in words 0020 allocated in the PC If any communications error occurs the program will stop and a stop command will be sent to the Inverter This state will continue until the Communications Fau
27. 3CN for option D area i E EE _ Q 2 U Front View Side View Note When the DeviceNet Communications Card is mounted other Optional Cards cannot be mounted in the C area 3 2 2 Communications Cable Wiring Connecting Communications Cables This section explains how to prepare and connect the communications cables to connectors for the DeviceNet Network Use the following procedure to prepare and connect the communications cables to the connectors Note For connecting of the DeviceNet Communications Card of the Inverter use DCA1 5C10 Thin Cables Thick Cables cannot be used for this kind of wiring because of the terminal block dimensions 1 Remove about 30 mm of the cable covering being careful not to damage the shield weaving under neath Do not remove more than about 30 mm removing too much of the covering can result in short circuits About 30 mm 2 Carefully peel back the weaving to reveal the signal lines power lines and the shielding wire The shielding wire will be loose on the outside of the other lines but it is harder than the weaving Shielding wire 41 Setup and Wiring Chapter 3 3 Remove the exposed weaving and the aluminum tape from the signal and power lines Strip the covering from the signal and power lines to the proper length for the crimp terminals Twist together the wires of each of the signal and power lines Strip to match the crimp terminals Inverter Internal Wiring K
28. 99 DeviceNet Communications Card Operations Chapter 5 e D Destination Information 15 8 7 Q D Digits 2 to 4 Number of words to transfer 001 to 128 BCD Set total number of words to transfer including leading word S Digit 1 Destination unit number of the Special Unit 0 to F hex 0 to 15 Set the unit number of the Master Unit Message Timing The Message Communications Enabled Flag must be used as an execution condition for the Master when IOWR is used Be sure this flag is ON before executing IOWR If IOWR is executed when this flag is OFF a Special I O Unit error may be generated for the Master Message Execution Communications condition Enabled Flag A 1 IOWR is executed when the execution condition is met and the Message Communications Enabled Flag is ON 2 When IOWR is executed it is self held by bit B 3 When IOWR is completed the Equals Flag turns ON and the self holding bit is cleared Note 1 If IOWR ends in an error the Equals Flag will not turn ON so the self holding bit will remain ON Note 2 The Equals Flag is also affected by the execution of other instructions so be careful not to use any other such instructions between IOWR and the Equals Flag 100 DeviceNet Communications Card Operations Chapter 5 Timing of Message Response Reading Responses are read when the Message Communications Enabled Flag turns ON in the next cycle The Message Communications Enabled Flag
29. Bits 8 to 15 Not used 117 DeviceNet Communications Card Operations Register No Hex Operating status Chapter 5 Contents Monitors U1 12 Bit O During RUN Bit 1 Zero speed Bit 2 Forward reverse 1 Reverse operation Bit 3 During fault reset input Bit 4 Frequency agree Bit 5 Operation ready Bit 6 Alarm Minor fault Bit 7 Fault Bits 8 to 15 Not used Cumulative operation time Monitors U1 13 1 hr units FLASH ID software No Monitors U1 14 Frequency reference voltage Terminal A1 input value Monitors U1 15 0 1 units 100 10 V with sign for voltage setting Multi function analog input Terminal A2 input value Monitors U1 16 0 1 units 100 20 mA or 100 10 V with sign for voltage setting Motor secondary current Monitors U1 18 0 1 units motor s rated secondary current 100 with sign Motor excitation current Monitors U1 19 0 1 units motor s rated secondary current 100 with sign Output frequency after a soft start Monitors U1 20 0 01 Hz units with sign Input to speed control loop Monitors U1 21 0 01 max frequency 100 with sign Output from speed control loop Monitors U1 22 0 01 units motor s rated secondary current 100 with sign PID feedback Monitors U1 24 0 01 units input corresponding to max frequency 100 with sign Volt
30. Communications Programs sysMAC CS series PCs Chapter 7 Ladder Program 000000 000004 DIFU 013 003000 003000 000004 000002 003000 MOV 021 0001 0001 MOV 021 0010 D00100 MOV 021 0010 D00100 ORW 035 0001 D00101 MOV 021 0003 D00100 MOV 021 0024 D00101 000100 Sets frequency reference 000101 Sets control input 000102 Reads output frequency Reads Inverter status 000103 MOV 021 0003 D00100 MOV 021 002C D00101 000100 003002 000101 000102 000103 003002 XFER 070 0002 D00100 MOVD 083 D00102 0010 CMP 020 0010 000100 Equals Flag P_EQ 003100 CMP 020 0002 D01002 Equals Flag P_EQ 003101 003100 003101 ASL 025 0001 000300 195 Communications Programs SYSMAC Cs series PCs Chapter 7 196 000101 003103 000102 003105 003106 CMP 020 0010 Equals Flag P_EQ 003103 ANDW is e D01002 CMP 020 0001 D01002 Equals Flag P_EQ 003104 ASL 025 0001 000301 CMP 020 0003 Equals Flag P_EQ 003105 ANDW EEE e D01002 CMP 020 0024 D01002 Equals Flag P_EQ 003106 ANDW PER p D01003 ANDW ET __ D01004 ASL 025
31. No Hex range unit setting during Instance Attribute operation A1 01 0101 01 01 Parameter access level 0to2 1 2 Yes A1 03 0103 01 03 Initialize 0 to 3 330 1 0 No A1 04 0104 01 04 Password 0 to 9 999 1 0 No A1 05 0105 01 05 Password setting 0 to 9 999 1 0 No Application Parameters Reference selection Parameter Register Class 64 Hex Setting Setting Default Change No Hex range unit setting during Instance Attribute operation switching to remote mode b1 02 0181 01 81 Operation method selec 0 to 3 1 1 No tion b1 03 0182 01 82 Stopping method selec O0to3 1 0 No tion b1 07 0186 01 86 Operation selection after O or 1 1 0 No Run command selection in programming modes Oor1 b2 01 0189 01 89 Zero speed level DC in 0 0 to 10 0 0 1 Hz jection braking starting frequency b2 02 018A 01 8A DC injection braking cur 0 to 100 1 rent b2 03 018B 01 93 DC injection braking time 0 00 to 0 01 s at start 10 00 b2 04 018C 01 8C DC Injection braking time 0 00 to 0 01 s at stop 10 00 b3 01 0191 01 91 Speed search selection 2or3 1 current detection or speed calculation 141 DeviceNet Communications Card Operations Parameter Register No Hex Class 64 Hex Instance Attribute Speed search operating current current detec tion
32. Not communications 0 Communications 002010 Run command mode 1 Not communications 0 Communications 002011 Overtorque detection 1 Detected 002012 Frequency reference lost 1 Lost 002013 Retrying error 1 Retrying 002014 Fault including RS 422A 485 communications time out 1 fault occurred 002015 Communications time out 1 Timed out e Program related Bits Used 000000 Program Start Input Bit 000001 Program End Input Bit 000002 Program Execution Flag 000003 Communications Error Reset Input Bit 000004 Inverter Stop Command Flag 000100 Frequency Reference Write Flag 000101 Control Input Write Flag 000102 Output Frequency Read Flag 000103 Inverter Status Read Flag 000300 Frequency Reference Write Completed Flag 000301 Control Input Write Completed Flag 000302 Output Frequency Read Completed Flag 000303 Inverter Status Read Completed Flag 003110 Communications Error Flag e Inverter Control Input D01000 Reference frequency setting D02000 Output frequency monitor 192 Chapter 7 Communications Programs SYSMAC Cs series PCs Chapter 7 e Remote I O Allocation Areas I O classification Word address Output Register number leftmost bits Function code 10 Write 03 PC to Inverter Read Register data leftmost bits Register number rightmost bits Not used Register data rightmost bits Input Register number leftmost bits Function code 10 Wr
33. OFF Bit 6 Multi function contact output terminals M3 M4 or P1 PC 1 ON 0 OFF Multi function contact output terminals M5 M6 or P2 PC 1 ON 0 OFF Overcurrent OC ground fault GF Injection brake transistor resistance overheat rr rH Bit 5 Fuse blown PUF Bit 6 PID feedback reference lost FbL Bit 7 External error EF EFO Bit 8 Hardware error CPF Bit 9 Motor overload OL1 or overtorque 1 OL3 detected Bit 10 PG broken wire detected PGO overspeed OS speed deviation DEV Main circuit undervoltage UV detected Bit 12 Main circuit undervoltage UV1 control power supply error UV2 inrush prevention circuit error UV3 Missing output phase LF RS 422A 485 communications error CE Operator disconnected OPR 0022 Data link status Bit O Writing data Bits 1 and 2 Not used Bit 3 Upper and lower limit errors Bit 4 Data integrity error Bits 5 to 15 Not used Frequency reference Monitors U1 01 Unit set with 01 03 Output frequency Monitors U1 02 Unit set with 01 03 0023 0024 Output voltage Monitors U1 06 0 1 V units reference ee ere ol Monitors U1 03 Inverters of 7 5 kW or less 0 01 A units Inverters of 11 kW or more 0 1 A units 115 DeviceNet Communications Card Operations Chapter 5 Hex Monitors U1 09 0 1 units 100 motor s rated torque Note Only enabled for vector control 002B Sequence input status Bit O Multi function input termi
34. Remote I O and messages Remote I O and mes sages Remote I O Max No of Slaves per Master Unit 63 50 32 Max No of controlled points per Master Unit 2 048 1 600 1 024 Allocation areas OUT CIO 1900 to CIO 1963 IN ClO 2000 to CIO 2063 OUT IR 050 to IR 099 IN IR 350 to IR 399 OUT IR 50 to IR 81 IN IR 350 to IR 381 Allocation method Words are allocated for each node to the above data areas in node address or der only 8 point Slaves Allocated 1 word 16 point Slaves Allocated 1 word Slaves with more than 16 points Allocated multiple words Without ex plicit mes Inverters sages 4 words remote I O 32 6 words remote I O 21 8 words remote I O 16 4 words remote I O 25 6 words remote I O 16 8 words remote I O 12 4 words remote I O 16 6 words remote I O 10 8 words remote I O 8 With explicit messages 4 words remote I O 32 6 words remote I O 21 8 words remote I O 16 4 words remote I O 25 6 words remote I O 16 8 words remote I O 12 e Communications with Configurator Free Allocation Applicable PC Master Unit CV Series CVM1 DRM21 V1 CS Series C200HX HG HE C200HW DRM21 V1 C200HS Supported communications Remote I O and messages Remote I O and messages Remote I O Max No of Slaves per Master Unit 63 63 63 Max No of controlled points per Master Unit 14
35. See note 1 Words that can be allocated CIO 0000 to 6143 WR W000 to W511 HR HROOO to HR511 DM D00000 to D32767 EM E00000 to E32767 Banks 0 to C Maximum number of words 1 block 500 words max 1 block 500 words max OUT 1 and IN 1 can be created OUT 1 IN 1 OUT 2 and IN 2 can anywhere in the above areas be created anywhere in the above Maximum 1 000 words areas Maximum 2 000 words Note 1 Free allocation using allocated DM Area words is only possible with the CS1W DRM21 or CJ1W DRM21 To perform free allocation with other Master Units use the Configurator Note 2 The Data Memory DM Area cannot manipulated by bit so it is not suitable as the remote I O allocation area for the Inverter 59 DeviceNet System Startup Chapter 4 e CVM1 DRM21 V1 and C200HW DRM21 V1 Master Units SYSMAC Programmable Controllers CV series PCs CS1 series C200HX HG HE PCs C200HS PCs CV500 All other PCs C200HE CPU11 Allother all models CVM1 CPU01 models all models E models E Words CIO 0000 to CIO 0000 CIO 000 to IR 000 to IR 235 IR 300 to IR IR 000 to that can CIO 2427 to CIO 235 511 IR 235 IR 300 be CIO 2555 CIO 300 to to IR 511 allocated CIO 511 G008 to G255 HR 000 to HR 00 to HR 99 HR 00 to HR H099 LR 00 to LR 63 99 CIO 1000 to LR 00 to LR CIO 1063 63 D00000 to D00000 to D00000 to DM 0000 to DM 0000 DM 0000 to D08191 D24575 D05999 DM 4095 to DM 5999 DM 5999 Each block c
36. Set the following data in the Master User Allocations Table and then turn ON the Master User Allocations Switch to execute allocation 1 The area i e CIO DM etc and first word of the OUT 1 block allocated to DeviceNet remote I O 2 The area and first word of the IN 1 block allocated to DeviceNet remote I O 3 The area and the first word of the Allocation Size Setup Table which indicates the words allocated to each DeviceNet slave Free allocation using the allocated DM Area words enables the following 49 DeviceNet System Startup Chapter 4 e Free allocation is possible without using a Configurator e Output words do not need to be allocated to Input Units only input words e Slaves that require two words can be allocated two words using only one node address so that the next node addresses can be set for another Slave Free allocation using the allocated DM Area words differs from free allocation using the Configurator in the following ways e Words can be allocated in order of node address only Allocation is not possible in any other order e Two blocks are used for setting 1 OUT block and 1 IN block Allocation is not possible using 4 blocks Size of 1 block 500 words max e The leftmost byte cannot be allocated to slaves with less than 16 points CPU Unit Set with allocated DM Area words Address Addresses in ascending Output order starting from
37. be transferred to the Inverter When the Control Input Write Completed Flag is turned ON the Con trol Input Write Flag will be turned OFF and the Output Frequency Reference Read Flag will be turned ON Bits are shifted to achieve this When the Output Frequency Read Flag is turned ON the output frequency of the Inverter will be read When the Output Frequency Read Completed Flag is turned ON the read output frequency will be stored in D02000 the Output Frequency Read Flag will be turned OFF and the Inverter Sta tus Read Flag will be turned ON Bits are shifted to achieve this When the Inverter Status Read Flag is turned ON the Inverter status will be read When the Inverter Status Read Completed Flag is turned ON the read Inverter status will be transferred to word 0020 the Inverter Status Read Flag will be turned OFF and the Frequency Reference Write Flag will be turned ON Setting the Frequency Reference Write Flag to ON will repeat the above steps 1 to 4 When the Program End Input Bit is turned ON the Inverter stop command will be written in the Inverter When word m bit 7 turns ON communications errors will be detected and the Communica tions Error Flag will be turned ON and will be self holding While this flag remains ON the system will perform the same processing as when the Program End Input Bit is turned ON When the Commu nications Error Reset Input Bit is turned ON the self holding state will be cleared
38. data in an explicit message the leftmost and rightmost bytes will be reversed Accordingly when reading or writing data the attribute value will be in the upper byte the lower byte will contain the lower byte of the data and the upper byte of the data will be in the upper byte of the next word e Communications line data is sent and received in the order of lower byte then upper byte e PLC internal processing data such as when sending commands are sent and received in the or der of upper byte then lower byte Parameter Read and Write Data Read data and write data for parameters is calculated as shown below and then transmitted in hexade cimal e Convert to hexadecimal values with the function parameter minimum setting unit taken as 1 Example To set a frequency reference of 60 Hz when the minimum setting unit is 0 01 Hz 60 0 01 6000 1770 Hex 112 DeviceNet Communications Card Operations Chapter 5 e Negative numbers are expressed as two s complements Example To set a frequency reference bias n061 of 100 when the minimum setting unit is 1 100 1 100 Dec 0064 Hex 100 FF9C Hex 0064 Hex 0 0 0 00000011 0011 a as tt It reversal FF9B Hex 4 1 1 1 1 1 4 1 14 0 0 1 1 0 44 FF9C Hex 11111111 4100 11100 D a e f the original data is already in hexadecimal it is transmitted as is e Set bits that are not used to 0 e Do not set data for unused registers En
39. e Perform the following settings to specify units for data related to frequencies speeds used in Device Net communications e The standard unit used with DeviceNet is r min so always set the number of motor poles Parameter Set value Contents Default setting No 0 0 01 Hz 1 0 01 max frequency is 100 2 to 39 r min Set the number of motor poles 40 to 3 999 Specifies the value used to set and display the maximum frequency L Set a 4 digit value without the decimal point Set the position of the digit where the decimal point is to be displayed starting from the rightmost digit Example To display the maximum frequency as 200 0 specify 12000 4 2 2 3G3FV Inverters In order to perform DeviceNet communications it is necessary to make settings for the Inverter accord ing to the application Note The parameters set here are applied to the DeviceNet Communications Card when the power is turned ON Turn OFF the power after changing parameters and turn ON again to apply them Frequency Reference Selection e Select the method for inputting frequency references to the Inverter Select the method suitable for the application Parameter Set value Contents Default setting No d1 01 Value set in d1 01 used External Set using analog input from control terminals circuit terminals Not used Do not set Optional Card Set using DeviceNet C
40. frequency reference setting and display units The default setting is 0 01 Hz Note 2 The multi function analog output 1 and 2 registers can be used to set the Inverter s analog outputs by means of communications To do that set 31 1F hex for H4 01 multi function analog output terminal 21 monitor selection and H4 04 multi function analog output terminal 23 monitor selection Note 3 The Inverter s multi function outputs can be turned from ON to OFF by means of communica tions To do that set F for multi function output parameters H2 01 multi function contact output terminals 9 10 function selection H2 01 multi function output 1 terminal 25 function selection and H2 03 multi function output 2 terminal 25 function selection 5 8 2 Inverter Monitoring Functions All Inverter monitoring can be accessed To read Inverter status fault monitoring alarm monitoring I O status monitoring error log etc specify the register number from the following table and read the data Register number hex Function Content 0010 Inverter status Refer to table below Yes No 0011 Operator status Refer to table below Yes No 0012 Operator setting error OPE error number Yes No number 0013 Not used 0014 Fault 1 Refer to table below Yes No 0015 Fault 2 Refer to table below Yes No 0016 Fault 3 Not used Yes No 0017 CPF error 1 Refer to table below Yes No 0
41. with sign PID output quantity Monitors U1 37 0 01 units max frequency 100 with sign PID reference Monitors U1 38 0 01 units max frequency 100 RS 422A 485 communications error Monitors U1 39 Bit O CRC error Bit 1 Invalid data length Bit 2 Not used Bit 3 Parity error Bit 4 Overrun error Bit 5 Framing error Bit 6 Time out Bits 7 to F Not used Fan operating time Monitors U1 40 1 hr units Current fault Monitors U2 01 Code Error display Error display Code Error display 01 PUF OE 02 UV1 OF 03 UV2 10 04 UV3 11 06 GF 12 07 OC 13 08 OV 14 09 OH 15 OA OH1 18 0B OL1 19 oC OL2 1A oD OL3 1B Last fault Monitors U2 02 same codes as U2 01 139 DeviceNet Communications Card Operations Chapter 5 Register No Contents Hex Fault frequency Monitors U2 03 0 01 Hz units units set in 01 03 with sign reference Fault output reference Monitors U2 04 0 01 Hz units units set in 01 03 with sign Monitors U2 05 Inverters of 7 5 kW or less 0 01 A units Fault output current Inverters of 11 kW or more 0 1 A units Not used Fault output voltage reference Monitors U2 07 0 1 V units Fault main circuit DC voltage Monitors U2 08 1 V units Fault output power Monitors U2 09 0 1 kW units with
42. 0 0 to 0 1 Hz 0 0 No d3 02 0295 02 95 Jump frequency 2 400 0 0 1 Hz 0 0 No d3 03 0296 02 96 Jump frequency 3 0 1 Hz 0 0 No d3 04 0297 02 97 Jump frequency width 0 0 to 20 0 0 1 Hz 1 0 No d6 01 02A0 02 AO Field weakening level 0 to 100 1 80 No d6 02 02A1 02 Al Field frequency 0 0 to 0 1 Hz 0 0 No 400 0 144 DeviceNet Communications Card Operations Chapter 5 Motor Constant Parameters Parameter Register Class 64 Hex Setting Setting Default Change No Hex range unit setting during Instance Attribute operation Input voltage setting 155 to 255 200 400 155 to See note 510 See 1 note 1 V f pattern selection OtoF F E cannot be set Max output frequency 0 0 to 50 0 120 0 Max voltage 0 0 to 200 0 255 0 0 0 400 0 to 510 0 See note See note 1 1 Base frequency 0 0 to 120 0 Mid output frequency 0 0 to 3 0 120 0 Mid output frequency 0 0 to 255 F 15 0 30 0 voltage 0 0 to See note 510 0 1 See note 1 Min output frequency 0 0 to 1 5 120 0 Min output frequency 0 0 to i 9 0 18 0 voltage 255 0 0 0 See note to 510 0 1 See note 1 Mid output frequency 2 0 0 to 0 0 See 120 0 note 2 Mid output frequency 0 0 to 0 0 See voltage 2 255 0 0 0 note 2 to 510 0 See note 1 Base voltage 0 0 to 0 0 See 255 0 0 0 note 3 to 510 0 See note 1 Motor rated current 0 32 to Depends 6 40 See on no
43. 0 to 100 1 0 No detection level b5 14 01B1 oo Feedback loss 0 0 to 25 0 0 1 s 1 0 No detection time b6 01 019C 01 17 Dwell frequency at 0 0 to 400 0 0 1 Hz 0 0 No start b6 02 019D 01 18 Dwell time at start 0 0 to 10 0 0 1 s 0 0 No b6 03 019E 01 19 Dwell frequency at 0 0 to 400 0 0 1 Hz 0 0 No stop b6 04 019F 01 1A Dwell time at stop 0 0 to 10 0 0 1 s 0 0 No b7 01 01A0 01 1B Droop control gain 0 0 to 100 0 0 1 Hz 0 0 Yes b7 02 01A1 01 1C Droop control delay 0 03 to 2 00 0 01 s 0 05 Yes time b8 01 01A2 01 1D Energy saving gain 0 to 100 1 80 No b8 02 01A3 01 1E Energy saving 0 0 to 400 0 0 1 Hz 0 0 No frequency b9 01 01A4 01 1F Zero servo gain 0 to 100 1 5 No b9 02 01A5 01 20 Zero servo 0 to 16 383 1 pulse 10 No completion width Note When the control mode is changed the Inverter will revert to default settings The open loop vec tor control default setting is given above 160 DeviceNet Communications Card Operations Chapter 5 Tuning Parameters Parameter Register Class 64 Hex Setting range Setting Default Changes No Hex unit setting during op Instance Attribute eration C1 01 0200 01 21 Acceleration time 1 0 0 to 6 000 0 0 1 10 0 Yes C1 02 0201 01 22 Deceleration time 1 See note 1 Yes C1 03 0202 01 23 Acceleration time 2 Yes C1 04 0203 01 24 Deceleration time 2 Yes C1 05
44. 0 to 2 0 0 1s Depends No ridethru time on capacity L2 03 0487 04 87 Min baseblock time 0 1 to 5 0 0 1s Depends No on capacity L2 04 0488 04 88 Voltage recovery time 0 0 to 5 0 0 1s Depends No on capacity L2 05 0489 04 89 Undervoltage detection 150 to 210 1V 190 380 No level 150 to See note 420 See note L3 01 048F 04 8F Stall prevention selection O to 2 1 1 No during accel L3 02 0490 04 90 Stall prevention level 0 to 200 1 120 No during accel L3 04 0492 04 92 Stall prevention selection 0 to 2 1 1 No during decel 147 DeviceNet Communications Card Operations Chapter 5 Parameter Register Class 64 Hex Setting Default Change No Hex range setting during Instance Attribute operation L3 05 0493 04 93 Stall prevention selection 0 to 2 1 1 No during running L3 06 0494 04 94 Stall prevention level 30 to 200 1 120 No during running L4 01 0499 04 99 Speed agreement 0 0 to 0 1 Hz 0 0 No detection level 400 0 L4 02 049A 04 9A Speed agreement 0 0 to 20 0 0 1 Hz 2 0 No detection width L4 05 049D 04 9D Operation when Oor1 1 0 No frequency reference is lost L4 06 04C2 04 C2 Frequency reference for 0 0 to 0 1 80 0 No loss of frequency 100 0 reference L5 01 049E 04 9E Number of auto restart Oto 10 1 0 No attempts L5 02 049F 04 OF Auto restart operation Oor1 1 0 No selection L6 01 04A1 04 A1 Torque detection Oto8 1 0 No se
45. 00 0 cee cece eee 183 7 2 2 Reading Writing Data 0 2 cee eee 187 7 3 Special Remote I O Programs 0 191 viii Table of contents 7 3 1 Simple Operation Programs 0 0 00 191 7 3 2 Reading Parameter Data 0 cee eee 197 7 3 3 Writing Parameter Data 0 0 ec ee ee 200 CHAPTER 8 Appendix setioak eaaa en aae 205 8 1 Specifications scai eie i a SE R A ee E R E a ERa aaa 206 822 OBJETS ia an E E eee EA E O E EE poe a R a a a 207 8 2 1 Identify Objects Identification Information Class 01 Hex 207 8 2 2 Message Router Objects Class 02 Hex 0 0 0 eee eee eee ee 208 8 2 3 DeviceNet Objects Class 03 Hex 0 0 eee ee eee 209 8 2 4 Assembly Objects Class 04 Hex 0 0 eee eee ee 210 8 2 5 DeviceNet Connection Objects Class 05 Hex 0 0 00 0000000 212 8 3 DeviceNet Communications Response Time 0 0 00 c eee eee eee ee 216 Revision History sssesssssecssocesssooee 219 Index 4 44626 ieuersntotaetaceesarenuunetsaassiwan 221 Ix Transportation Installation Wiring and Maintenance Precautions WARNING WARNING N WARNING N WARNING N WARNING WARNING N Caution N Caution N Caution Do not touch the conductive parts such as internal PCBs or terminal blocks while power is being supplied Doing so may result in electrical shock Turn ON the input power supply only after mount
46. 0001 to 002A 0064 Hex with Inverter s DeviceNet Communications Card S 7 Instance ID code Set DeviceNet instance code for relevant function S 8 Attribute ID code Attached data for writing Set DeviceNet attribute code for relevant function Attached data for writing e W Number of Words to Transfer Destination Unit Number W 1 Ww 15 8 7 0 15 8 7 Q W TTTTTTTTET TT TTT itt Destination unit number 00000 to OOOF Hex 0 to 15 Set the unit number of the Master Unit Number of words to transfer 0001 to 0080 Hex 1 to 128 Set the total number of words to be transferred including leading word S Example 000A0001 sends 10 words to Master Unit with unit number 1 IOWR for C200HX HG HE With C200OHW DRM21 V1 DeviceNet Master Unit C200HX HG HE PCs explicit messages are sent using IOWR To send an explicit message it is necessary to place FINS command 2801 in front and to send the command to the Master Unit The Master Unit that receives the command converts the com 98 DeviceNet Communications Card Operations Chapter 5 mand data to an explicit message and transfers it to the destination node When sending an explicit message it is not possible to directly specify the destination node with IOWR e C Control Code The control code is set as shown below for DeviceNet Master Units 15 B 7 la C 0 Destination unit address FE Master Unit Master Unit
47. 002E to 0030 Not used 0031 Main circuit DC voltage Monitors U1 07 1 V units 0032 to 0037 Not used 0038 PID feedback quantity 1 10 100 Input corresponding to max output frequency without sign 0039 PID input quantity 1 10 100 Max output frequency without sign 003A PID output quantity 1 10 100 Max output frequency without sign 003B CPU software number 003C Flash software number 137 DeviceNet Communications Card Operations Register No Hex Chapter 5 Contents Communications error details Bit O CRC error Bit 1 Invalid data length Bit 2 Not used Bit 3 Parity error Bit 4 Overrun error Bit 5 Framing error Bit 6 Time out Bits 7 to F Not used kVA setting Control method Frequency reference Monitors U1 01 0 01 Hz units units set in 01 03 with sign Output frequency Monitors U1 02 0 01 Hz units units set in 01 03 with sign Output current Monitors U1 03 Inverters of 7 5 kW or less 0 01 A units Inverters of 11 kW or more 0 1 A units Not used Output voltage Monitors U1 06 0 1 V units Main circuit DC voltage Monitors U1 07 1 V units Output power Monitors U1 08 0 1 kW units with sign Not used Input terminal status Monitors U1 10 1 ON Bits 0 to 6 correspond to termin
48. 1 e Functions and System Configuration 1 1 2 1 3 1 4 Functions New Functions DeviceNet Features DeviceNet System Configuration Functions and System Configuration Chapter 1 1 1 Functions The 3G3FV PDRT1 SINV1 DeviceNet Communications Card is a dedicated communications interface card that makes it possible for the SYSDRIVE 3G3RV 3G3PV and 3G3FV Inverters to communicate with SYSMAC Programmable Controllers Installing a DeviceNet Communications Card in a SYS DRIVE 3G3RV 3G3PV or 3G3FV Inverter permits a Programmable Controller to monitor RUN STOP and operating conditions and to make changes in set values a 3G3FV PDRT1 SINV1 DeviceNet Communications Card mo at aA E Easy Communications The following two functions can be used simultaneously in DeviceNet communications between the CPU Unit of aSYSMAC PC and a SYSDRIVE 3G8RV 3G3PV or 3G3FV Inverter Remote I O Communications I O is automatically transferred between Slaves and the CPU Unit without any special program ming in the CPU Unit Automatically transmits Inverter control inputs such as RUN or STOP from a SYSMAC PC to the SYSDRIVE Inverter and returns operation status of the Inverter or output frequency monitor data e Message Communications Message communications are performed between a CPU Unit to which a Master Unit is mounted and Slaves SYSDRIVE 3G3RV 3G3PV 3G3FV Inverters by executing specific instructions
49. 18 2 1 1 Network Components si ka cece cee eee nee 18 2 1 2 Connections s is se esterase sees She ea ee eae bee ee Ca E DA ee ed aa 19 2 2 Network Configuration Restrictions 0 0 0 eee eee eens 20 2 2 1 Baud Rate and Communications Distance 0 0 0 2 eee ee eee 20 2 2 2 Locating Terminating Resistors 0 0 cece cece eee eens 21 2 3 Communications Power Supply 0 0 0 0 cece eee eens 22 2 3 1 Locating the Communications Power Supply 2 20008 22 2 3 2 Step 1 Determining the Best Location for the Power Supply froma Graph 25 2 3 3 Step 2 Calculating the Best Location of the Actual Nodes 27 2 3 4 Step 3 Splitting the System into Multiple Power Supplies 29 2 3 5 Dual Power Supplies 0 0 0 eee eee 30 2 4 Communications Line Noise Prevention 0 0 0 cece eee eee 31 2 4 1 Communications Line Noise 0 0 eee es 31 2 4 2 Grounding the Network 0 0 0 eee eee eee 31 2 4 3 Communications Power Supply Noise Prevention 005 32 2 4 4 Noise Prevention Wiring 00 0 eee cee eee nee 33 2 4 5 Noise Prevention for Peripheral Devices 0 000 000 cece eee eee 34 CHAPTER 3 Setup and Wiring c ccc cece cccceeeseceees 35 3 1 Nomenclature and Settings onen oii nia i aa cee eee nee 36 JTF Names of Parts arse aa ends aes be Teese a6 Law ene see esa lt 4 36 3 1 2
50. 3 6 8 command format 104 explicit messages 93 FINS messages 93 operations 93 overview 93 programming 183 response format 105 response read timing 96 103 responses 104 timing 96 100 101 103 Message Communications Enabled Flag 100 102 184 188 CS1 Series 101 Message Communications Status Flag 101 Message Execution Flag 188 message router objects 105 details 209 service codes 209 Message Sent Flag 188 message transmission 102 motor constant objects details 106 motor data objects 105 mounting procedure 40 multi drop trunk lines 7 multi layer network 6 multi vendor network 3 6 8 Multi function Input Bits 191 N Net Control 76 Net Control Bit 180 Net Reference 76 Net Reference Bit 180 Network Communications Enabled Flag 96 103 Network Communications Error Flag 96 104 network configuration 6 components 18 node location 27 overview 18 power supply location 25 restrictions 20 node addresses 38 setting pins 38 noise prevention communications power supply 32 peripheral devices 34 wiring 33 nomenclature 36 O objects types 207 operation indicators 37 172 Operator status 152 output frequency monitor 192 Output Frequency Read Completed Flag 192 Output Frequency Read Flag 192 P parameter constants 85 reading writing 3G3FV Inverters 159 3G3PV Inverters 141 3G3RV Inverters 120 parameter objects 81
51. 3G3MV Inverter Service code OE Read 10 Write Number of command data bytes Hex Class ID Hex Instance ID Hex Attribute ID Hex D00006 to D00009 Write data Hex See note Response Storage Words D03000 D03001 D03002 D03003 Command Code 2801 Completion Code Number of Received Bytes Node Address Service Code 8E Normal read 90 Normal write 94 Error D03004 to D00009 Read Data or Error Code D00100 Storage Area for Communications Error Completion Codes 187 Communications Programs sysMAC CS series PCs Chapter 7 Timing Chart 001000 Program Start Input Bit 001001 Start Switch ON a 000000 Message Execution Flag 003000 i Sending Message Flag r 003001 Message Sent Flag a CMND instruction execution mm 000001 CMND Write Completed Flag E aa eS aa 000002 Response Flag T Message Communications SS a E a e a Enabled Flag H Completion code error ie ee a O D00100 Completion code storage a_ L V C Operation 1 When the Program Start Input Bit is turned ON the Message Execution Flag will turn ON and the command specified in the DM Area will be sent using the IOWR instruction 2 When the Message Communications Enabled Flag is turned ON the completion code D030
52. 6 400 100 words x 4 blocks Without messages 4 800 With messages 1 600 1 280 total of 4 blocks Functions and System Configuration Applicable PC Allocation areas Chapter 1 C200HS CV Series CS Series C200HX HG HE Core I O Area CIO 0000 to CIO 2555 CIO 0000 to CIO 2427 for CV500 CVM1 CPU01 VO IR Area 1 IR 000 to IR 235 IR Area 2 IR 300 to IR 511 CPU Bus Link Area GO008 to G255 HR Area HR 00 to HR 99 LR Area LR 00 to LR 63 DM Area D00000 to D24575 D00000 to DM Area DM 0000 to DM 5999 DM 0000 to DM 4095 for C200OHE CPU11 Z DM Area DM 0000 to DM 5999 D08191 for CV500 CVM1 CPU01 VO Allocation method Words are allocated to each node in the above data areas in any order using the Configurator The following limitations apply The allocation areas are in 4 blocks OUT 1 OUT 2 IN 1 and IN 2 Each block consists of sequential words 100 words max per block For Slaves with more than 8 points the first byte cannot be specified in leftmost bits 7 to 15 Words are allocated to Slaves as follows 8 point Slaves Allocated leftmost or rightmost byte of 1 word 16 point Slaves Allocated 1 word Slaves with more than 16 points Allocated multiple words For Slaves with an odd number of bytes the last byte will be the rightmost byte Max No of Inverters using one Master Unit only W
53. CF 09 OH 15 EF7 27 EFO OA OH1 18 OS 28 FBL 0B OL1 19 DEV 29 UL3 oC OL2 1A PGO 2A UL4 oD OL3 1B PF 2B OL7 Last fault Monitors U2 02 same codes as U2 01 Fault frequency reference Monitors U2 03 0 01 Hz units units set in 01 03 with sign Fault output reference Monitors U2 04 0 01 Hz units units set in 01 03 with sign Fault output current Monitors U2 05 Inverters of 7 5 kW or less 0 01 A units Inverters of 11 kW or more 0 1 A units Fault motor speed Monitors U2 06 0 01 Hz units units set in 01 03 with sign Fault output voltage reference Monitors U2 07 0 1 V units Fault main circuit DC voltage Monitors U2 08 1 V units Fault output power Monitors U2 09 0 1 kW units with sign Fault torque reference Monitors U2 10 0 1 units 100 motor s rated torque with sign Fault input terminal status Monitors U2 11 same contents as U1 10 Fault output terminal status Monitors U2 12 same contents as U1 11 Fault operating status Monitors U2 13 same contents as U1 12 Fault cumulative operation time Monitors U2 14 1 hr units Content of last fault Monitors U3 01 same codes as U2 01 Content of 2nd prior fault Monitors U3 02 same codes as U2 01 Content of 3rd prior fault Monitors U3 03 same codes as U2 01 Content of 4th prior fault Monitors U3 04 same codes a
54. Carrier frequency upper 2 0 to 15 0 0 1 kHz Depends No limit See notes on 2 and 3 capacity C6 04 0226 02 26 Carrier frequency lower 0 4 to 15 0 0 1 kHz Depends No limit See notes on 2 and 3 capacity C6 05 0227 02 27 Carrier frequency 00 to 99 1 00 No proportional gain See note 3 Note 1 When the control mode is changed the Inverter will revert to default settings The V f control default setting is given above Note 2 The setting range depends on the capacity of the Inverter Note 3 These parameters can be monitored or set only when F is set for C6 02 143 DeviceNet Communications Card Operations Reference Parameters Chapter 5 Parameter Register Class 64 Hex Setting Setting Default Change No Hex range unit setting during Instance Attribute operation d1 01 0280 02 80 Frequency reference 1 0 to max 0 01 Hz 0 00 Yes d1 02 0281 02 81 Frequency reference 2 Senet hae 4 0 00 Yes d1 03 0282 02 82 Frequency reference 3 0 00 Yes d1 04 0283 02 83 Frequency reference 4 0 00 Yes d1 17 0292 02 92 Jog frequency reference 6 00 Yes d2 01 0289 02 89 Frequency reference up 0 0 to 0 1 100 0 No per limit 110 0 d2 02 028A 02 8A Frequency reference 0 0 to 0 1 0 0 No lower limit 110 0 d2 03 0293 02 93 Master speed reference 0 0 to 0 1 0 0 No lower limit 110 0 d3 01 0294 02 94 Jump frequency 1
55. Forward Stop Bit 180 191 free allocation 7 9 allocation areas 59 application procedure 62 communications 14 example 62 restrictions 51 61 with allocated DM Area words 49 with Configurator 50 frequency reference ladder program 182 settings 192 Frequency Reference Input Bit 180 222 Index Frequency Reference Write Completed Flag 192 Frequency Reference Write Flag 192 functions 2 G grounding 31 Communications Card 31 network 31 I O Area Overlap 56 T O Area Range Violation 56 T O power supply 18 identify objects 105 details 208 service codes 207 status 208 installation Communications Card 40 precautions 39 T branch Tap 43 T branch Tap Terminating Resistor 45 Terminating Resistor 45 instruction set CMND 187 CMND 194 94 102 IOWR 187 C200HX HG HE 98 CS1 Series 97 Interface Unit 10 internal circuit power supply 18 Inverter 11 allocated words 76 control input 192 word allocation 191 fault detection 177 fault processing 183 190 fault status 177 memory data backup 177 monitoring 155 monitoring function 157 monitoring functions 115 136 151 outputs 151 run commands 76 150 settings 65 status 152 word allocation 192 wiring 42 Inverter Ready Bit 180 Inverter Status Read Completed Flag 192 Inverter Status Read Flag 192 Inverter Stop Command Flag 192 ISA Board 10 M memory data backup 177 message communications 2
56. Green Flashing The CPU Unit of the Card is operating normally Red Lit The CPU Unit of the Card is not ready or the CPU Unit has malfunctioned Not lit Power is not being supplied from the Inverter The Card is not connected properly and power is not being to supplied to it Note When both of the baud rate setting pins DRO and DR1 are set to ON both the MS and NS will be lit in red 37 Setup and Wiring Chapter 3 3 1 4 Baud Rate and Node Address Settings In a DeviceNet Network the baud rate can be set to 500 Kbps 250 Kbps or 125 Kbps To manage Master Slave communications numbers are assigned as node addresses DR1 DRO ADAS ADR4 ADRG ADR2 ADR1 ADRO Baud rate setting pins Node address setting pins Note Default settings are all OFF en n Baud Rate Setting Pins Pin 500Kbps 250Kbps 125Kbps DR1 ON OFF OFF DRO OFF ON OFF Node Address Setting Pins Node Address 8 9 10 Note 1 The same node address cannot be used for more than one Slave connected to the commu nications line Note 2 Remote I O allocations in the CPU Unit are affected by the node addresses so make sure that the remote I O allocations do not overlap before setting a node address Refer to Chapter 4 DeviceNet System Startup 38 Setup and Wiring Cha
57. Instance Attribute operation H3 01 0409 01 87 Signal selection Oor1 1 0 No terminal 13 Voltage H3 02 040A 01 88 Gain terminal 13 0 0 to 1 000 0 0 1 100 0 Yes H3 03 040B 01 89 Bias terminal 13 100 0 to 100 0 0 1 0 0 Yes H3 04 040C 01 8A Multi function analog Oor1 1 0 No input signal selection terminal 16 H3 05 040D 01 8B Selection terminal 16 0 to 1F 1 1F No H3 06 040E 01 8C Gain terminal 16 0 0 to 1 000 0 0 1 100 0 Yes H3 07 040F 01 8D Bias terminal 16 100 0 to 100 0 0 1 0 0 Yes H3 08 0410 01 8E Signal selection O0to2 1 2 No terminal 14 H3 09 0411 01 8F Selection terminal 14 1 to 1F 1 1F No H3 10 0412 01 90 Gain terminal 14 0 0 to 1 000 0 0 1 100 0 Yes H3 11 0413 01 91 Bias terminal 14 100 0 to 100 0 0 1 0 0 Yes H3 12 0414 01 92 Analog input filter time 0 00 to 2 00 0 01 s 0 00 No constant H4 01 0415 01 93 Multi function analog 1 to 38 See note 1 2 No output 1 selection 2 terminal 21 H4 02 0416 01 94 Gain terminal 21 0 00 to 2 50 0 01 1 00 Yes H4 03 0417 01 95 Bias terminal 21 10 0 to 10 0 0 1 0 0 Yes H4 04 0418 01 96 Multi function analog 1 to 38 See note 1 3 No output 2 selection 2 terminal 23 H4 05 0419 01 97 Gain terminal 23 0 00 to 2 50 0 01 0 50 Yes H4 06 041A 01 98 Bias terminal 23 10 0 to 10 0 0 1 0 0 Yes H4 07 041B 01 99 Analog output signal Oor1 1 0 No level selection H5 01 041C Not used 1F H5 02 041D Not used 3 H5 03 041E No
58. Master Unit are not actually used by the Master Unit so they can be used by other Slaves The actual node address of the Master Unit however cannot be the same as the node address of another Slave Note 2 When Slaves made by other companies are used that are for either output only or input only both the output area and the input area may be used depending on the status information Therefore be sure to check the specifications of the Slave before using any word allocated to a Slave Procedure e CS1W DRM21 or CJ1W DRM21 Master Units Fixed allocation is executed using the software switches in the area allocated to the Master Unit according to the following procedure 1 Put the CPU Unit in PROGRAM mode Allocation cannot be executed if the CPU Unit is not in PROGRAM mode Be sure to put the CPU Unit in PROGRAM mode 2 Turn ON the Master Enable Switch It is possible to set CS1W DRM21 or CJU1W DRM21 Master Units to function as Slave Units Enable the Master Unit functionality by turning ON the Master Enable Switch 3 Turn ON the Scan List Clear Switch Disable any scan list that has been created When the scan list is cleared all scan list data is lost and so make a backup copy if required 4 Select fixed allocation area Select fixed allocation area 1 2 or 3 55 DeviceNet System Startup Chapter 4 5 Turn ON the Scan List Enable Switch The Master Unit will create and store a scan list based on information from all th
59. O Operation 0 0 eee eee eee 77 5 2 Switching Remote I O Operation 0 00 ee eee eee 81 5 3 Special Remote I O Operation 0 cee cee eens 84 5 3 1 Overview of Special Remote O 0 0 eee eee 84 5 3 2 Special Remote I O Communications Timing 0 00008 86 5 3 3 Parameter Register Numbers for Each Function 0005 87 5 4 Control Remote I O Operation 0 00 88 5 5 Message Communications DeviceNet Explicit Messages 000 93 5 5 1 Overview of Message Communications Explicit Message Operations 93 5 5 2 Sending and Receiving Messages with a CS1W DRM21 or CJ1W DRM21 De viceNet Untt prsi esar et Se seth aie sheen eos eh Sine Gwe ere bs WE WR Nee 94 5 5 3 Sending and Receiving Messages with C2Q00HW DRM21 V1 DeviceNet Master UDI Soy a3 tek Ee Ea DALE EES CeO ys Gta Moe ee ae A EN alent ae ee 97 5 5 4 CVM1 DRM21 V1 DeviceNet Master Unit Message Transmission 102 5 5 5 Overview of Messages and Responses 0 000 c eee ee eee eee 104 5 5 6 Motor Data Objects Class 28 Hex 0 0 0 eee eee 105 5 5 7 Control Supervisor Objects Class 29 Hex 0 0 eee eee eee 106 5 5 8 AC DC Drive Objects Class 2A Hex 0 00 cee eee eee 109 5 5 9 Reading and Writing Parameters Class 64 Hex 0 0 0 0008 112 5 6 3G3RV Register Numbers Classes Instances and Attributes 0
60. Output Register number leftmost Function code 10 Write 03 PC to Inverter byte Read Register data leftmost byte Register number rightmost byte Not used Register data rightmost byte Input Register number leftmost Function code 10 Write 03 Inverter to PC byte Read Register data leftmost byte Register number rightmost byte Not used Register data rightmost byte Timing Chart 000000 Read Parameter Input Bit 003000 Data Read Flag 003005 Data Read Completed O E or Word n to n 2 Send Data lt Send Data Read Word m to m 2 Receive Data lt Receive Data Read 1 2 Operation 1 Set the register number of the parameter to be read in D00000 When the Read Parameter Input Bit is turned ON the Data Read Flag will be turned ON and parameter reading processing will be executed 2 If the data is normally read the read parameter register number and data will be returned by the Inverter When the register number that was sent agrees with the received register number the pa rameter data will be stored in D00001 the Data Read Completed Flag will be turned ON and the Data Read Flag will be turned OFF Note If the send data is faulty word m bit 7 will be turned ON which will turn ON the Faulty Data Flag and the program will be stopped until the Faulty Data Reset Input Bit 000002 is turned ON 198 Communications Programs sysMAC Cs series PCs C
61. See note 2 0 Preparing 1 Ready 0 Stop forward 1 During reverse run See note 4 0 Stop reverse 1 During forward run See note 5 0 Normal 1 Alarm Minor Fault 0 Normal 1 Fault Note 1 Reference From Net shows the input status of word n bit 6 Net Reference for DeviceNet communications Note 2 Control From Net shows the input status of word n bit 5 Net Control for DeviceNet commu nications Note 3 Reverse Operation indicates reverse output status This bit does not turn ON for DC braking DC injection 76 DeviceNet Communications Card Operations Chapter 5 Note 4 Forward Operation indicates either forward run status or DC braking DC injection status This bit turns ON even for DC braking DC injection during reverse run e Rotational Speed Reference Data Word address Bit Signal name Rotational speed reference data Content Communications data Rotational speed reference x 24 a Speed scale value of Class 2A Instance 01 Attribute 16 Initial value 0 The speed scale is assigned to the message function For instructions on how to change it refer to 5 5 Mes sage Communications e The unit for the rotational speed reference is set in 01 03 frequency reference setting and display units Setting example providing reference of 1 800 r min When the speed scale value is 0 and the number of motor poles is set in 01 03 so unit is
62. Setting range 0 to 200 unit 1 Chapter 5 Default setting Change during operation b3 03 0193 01 93 Speed search decelera tion time current detec tion 0 1 to 10 0 0 1s 2 0 No b3 05 0195 01 95 Speed search wait time current detection or speed calculation 0 0 to 20 0 0 1s 0 2 No b5 01 01A5 01 AS PID control mode selec tion Oor1 No Proportional gain P 0 00 to 25 00 0 01 1 00 Yes Integral I time 0 0 to 0 15 1 0 Yes 360 0 b5 04 01A8 01 A8 Integral I limit 0 0 to 0 1 100 0 Yes 100 0 back command loss detection b5 06 01AA 01 AA PID limit 0 0 to 0 1 100 0 Yes 100 0 b5 07 01AB 01 AB PID offset adjustment 100 0 to 0 1 0 0 Yes 100 0 b5 08 01AC 01 AC PID primary delay time 0 00 to 0 01 s 0 00 Yes constant 10 00 b5 12 01B0 01 BO Selection of PID feed Oto2 1 0 No b5 13 01B1 01 B1 PID feedback command loss detection level 0 to 100 1 No limiter Note The same capacity as the Inverter can be set by initializing this parameter 142 b5 14 01B2 01 B2 PID feedback command 0 0 to 25 5 0 1s 1 0 No loss detection time b5 15 01B3 01 B3 PID sleep function opera 0 0 to 0 1 Hz 0 0 No tion level 400 0 b5 16 01B4 01 B4 PID
63. Terminating Resistor is built into the Terminal block Terminating Resistor To connect the cable to the Terminating Resistor attach standard M3 crimp terminals to the signal wires and securely screw the terminals to the Terminal block Terminating Resistor Tighten to a torque of 0 5 N m oS SE 6 0 mm max am 6 0 mm max Note To avoid damaging the cable or breaking wires do not pull on the cable or bend it too sharply when connecting it to the terminal block Also never place heavy objects on top of the cable 45 Chapter 4 e DeviceNet System Startup 4 1 SYSMAC Word Allocations and Scan List 4 2 SYSDRIVE Inverter Settings 4 3 Startup Procedure 47 DeviceNet System Startup Chapter 4 4 1 SYSMAC Word Allocations and Scan List In a DeviceNet Network remote I O and message communications can be used simultaneously This section describes remote I O communications particularly the memory words allocated in the SYS MAC PC that correspond to the remote I O of the Slaves 4 1 1 Overview and Restrictions of Word Allocations Fixed Allocation Without Configurator If a Configurator is not used default word allocations are used in the DeviceNet Master Unit The remote I O is allocated in the order of DeviceNet node addresses and the words are divided into output areas and input areas The word allocation default settings of the Master Unit are set based on the assumption that one n
64. but differential operation will not be performed reducing resistance to noise e If the shield wire comes into contact with any of the signal lines a high level of noise will be superimposed on the line reducing resistance to noise 33 DeviceNet Communications Line Design Chapter 2 2 4 5 Noise Prevention for Peripheral Devices e Install surge suppressors on devices that generate noise particularly devices that have an inductive component such as motors transformers solenoids and magnetic coils Surge suppressor Surge suppressor Installed next to device Installed next to device ae ron TW Fj 2w T f i DC input type Device AC input type Device such as a motor such as a motor e If a surge suppressor does not fit on the device installing a ferrite core directly next to the device s contactors such as a contactor may be effective 3 r T 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 PEE g Device such as a motor Ferrite core 0443 1641151 Nisshin Electric Co Ltd e Insert a line filter on the primary side of the communications power supply e When there are two or more communications power supplies the communications power cables can be grounded by simply connecting a single Power Supply Tap near the center of the communications cable Do not ground shielding wire at more than one place T branch Tap or Power Supply Tap Ground at only one point or Communications Conne
65. controlled by the remote I O communications function When neces sary the message communications function is used to monitor each Inverter Note For connecting the DeviceNet Communications Card of the Inverter use DCA1 5C10 Thin Cables and branch them from the T branch Tap Thick Cables cannot be used for this kind of wiring because of the terminal block dimensions As for multi drop wiring use Thin Cables for direct insertion Thick Cables cannot be used for this kind of wiring Master Unit CS1W DRM21 CJ1W DRM21 C200HW DRM21 V1 CVM1 DRM21 V1 Message communications function _CMIND 490 _ Reading Inverter output current SYSDRIVE Inverter 8G3RV 3G3PV 3G3FV 3G3FV PDRT1 SINV1 Inverter run commands DeviceNet n 1 Rotational speed reference Communications Card Note T branch wiring using Thin Input Inverter to PC J Cables Switch Co Run Reverse OOOO Forward Stop Power supply Motor Selection of either the communications control input or local control input is possible using Net Ctrl Net Ref Functions and System Configuration Chapter 1 1 2 New Functions The software of the previous DeviceNet Communications Card 8G3FV PDRT1 SIN has been upgraded with this model 3G3FV PDRT1 SINV1 and new functions have been added Note The upgraded software used
66. for shift register MOV 021 0001 0000 MOV 021 No of send data bytes 0009 D01000 MOV 021 No of received bytes 0004 D01001 MOV 021 Network address 0001 D01002 Send destinati de add 63 MOv 021 en Jesi ua im oa e aaaress 3FFE Send destination unit number FE D01003 MOV 021 Response required 0000 Communications port No 0 D01004 Number of resends 0 MOV 021 Response monitor time 0064 10s D01005 MOV 021 Explicit message 2801 command DOZDOO MOV 021 Slave node address and D00400 service code OE Hex D02001 MOV 021 Class ID 0029 Da2z002 MOV 021 Instance ID 0001 D02002 MOV 021 Attribute ID 0D00 D02004 Sets CMND data 185 Communications Programs sysMAC CS series PCs Chapter 7 186 a00G00 003002 l4 C 003003 003003 151100 oo0000 Online Flag ASL 025 A20200 9000 Network Com munications CMND 490 Enabled Flag boz000 D03000 A21900 Network Com D01000 000001 munications Error Flag IH ASR 026 A A20200 0000 Network A21900 Network Com Commu munications Error Flag nications as
67. in H2 02 13 Multi function output 2 See note 1 and 2 0 1 Function set in H2 03 14 Not used 15 P lock completion See note 3 O 1 During P lock Note 1 The functions set with parameters H2 01 to H2 03 multi function contact output and multi function contact outputs 1 and 2 for 3G3RV 3G3FV Inverters and with parameters H2 01 and H2 02 multi function contact output and multi function output 1 for 3G3PV are enabled with these bits Note 2 This bit is not used with 3G3PV Inverters These Inverters have only 2 multi function out puts Note 3 The P lock function is only available with 3G3FV Inverters used in flux vector control mode It cannot be used with any other Inverter series or control mode 90 DeviceNet Communications Card Operations Chapter 5 e Reference Data Signal name Content Frequency reference Specifies the Inverter output frequency from communications e Setting unit 0 01 Hz See note 1 e Setting range 0 to maximum frequency in Hz See note 2 Example To set the frequency reference to 60 00 Hz 60 00 Hz 0 01 Hz 6000 Dec 1770 Hex Set as 1770 Hex Torque Specifies the torque reference or torque limit for the Inverter output See notes 3 and 4 reference torque limit The torque limit torque reference is only enabled when flux vector control is set e Whether torque reference or torque limit is specified depends on the Inverter s control mode Speed control tor
68. in this manual The following conventions are used to indicate and classify precautions in this manual Al ways heed the information provided with them Failure to heed precautions can result in inju ry to people or damage to property DANGER Indicates an imminently hazardous situation which if not avoided will result in death or serious injury WARNING Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which if not avoided could result in death or serious injury N Caution Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which if not avoided may result in minor or moderate injury or property damage OMRON Product References All OMRON products are capitalized in this manual The word Unit is also capitalized when it refers to an OMRON product regardless of whether or not it appears in the proper name of the product The abbreviation Ch which appears in some displays and on some OMRON products often means word and is abbreviated Wd in documentation in this sense The abbreviation PC means Programmable Controller and is not used as an abbreviation for anything else Visual Aids The following headings appear in the left column of the manual to help you locate different types of information Note Indicates information of particular interest for efficient and convenient operation of the product OMRON 1998 All rights reserved No part of this publication may be reproduced stored in a retrie
69. message communications function for setting some parameters and for monitoring the output current The differences between models are provided in the following tables 11 Functions and System Configuration Chapter 1 CS1W DRM21 or CJ1W DRM21 Master Units e Communications without Configurator Fixed Allocations Applicable PC CS Series Master Unit CS1W DRM21 CJ1W DRM21 Supported communications Remote I O and messages Maximum number of Slaves per 63 Master Unit Maximum number of controlled 2 048 points per Master Unit Allocation areas Select one of the following settings using the software switch Fixed Area Setting 1 2 or 3 Switch in the words allocated to the Master Unit in the CIO Area 1 OUT CIO 3200 to CIO 3263 IN CIO 3300 to CIO 3363 default 2 OUT CIO 3400 to CIO 3463 IN CIO 3500 to CIO 3563 3 OUT CIO 3600 to CIO 3663 IN CIO 3700 to CIO 3763 Allocation method Words are allocated for each node to the above data areas in node address order only 8 point Slaves Allocated 1 word 1 node address 16 point Slaves Allocated 1 word 1 node address Slaves with more than 16 points Allocated multiple words multiple node addresses 4 words remote I O 32 6 words remote I O 21 8 words remote I O 16 Maximum Without explicit number of messages Inverters With explicit messages 4 words remote I O 32 6 words remote I O 21 8 words remote I O 16 e Co
70. must be set for explicit messages Destination node address 0 to 3F hex 0 to 63 The Master Unit node address must be set for explicit messages Response setting ON No response OFF Response required Must be OFF response required for explicit messages e S Beginning Source Word Specify the beginning word address for the command data transferred to the DeviceNet Master Unit Preset the data to be transferred in consecutive words as shown in the following table Word address Beginning response storage word Set with the PC s variable area designation method Example DM 1000 82 DM area 03E8 1000 in hexadecimal 00 fixed at 00 for DM area Response monitor time 0000 hex gt 2s 0001 to 028F hex gt 0 1 to 65 5 s unit 0 1 s Number of command data bytes Set in hexadecimal Note Command data is the data set in words S 4 onwards Command data Set explicit message FINS command 2801 Node of Slave or Master for transmission Explicit message service code Address 0 to 3F hex 0 to 63 Write 10 Read 0E Class ID code Set DeviceNet class code for relevant function Set within 0001 to 002A or 0064 hex with Inverter s DeviceNet Communications Card Instance ID code Set DeviceNet instance code for relevant function Attribute ID code Attached data for writing Set DeviceNet attribute code for relevant function Attached data for writing
71. only when the scan list is enabled To eliminate and clear this error either create the scan list again or restore the network configuration corresponding to the scan list Fixed Allocation Example Node Output Input Output area Input area address points points Al i i ocation 0 0 8 CIO 3200 Allocation not possible CIO 3300 h t possibig Allocated 1 8 0 CIO 3201 EN Allocated CIO 3301 Allocation not possible 2 0 16 CIO 3202 Allocation not possible CIO 3302 Allocated 3 16 0 CIO 3203 Allocated ClO 3303 Allocation not possible Allocation Allocation 4 R 8 CIO 3204 not possible el SAE CIO 3304 not possible Aliocatec 5 16 16 CIO 3205 Allocated CIO 3305 Allocated 6 0 48 CIO 3206 Allocation not possible CIO 3306 Allocated 7 Master Unit see note 2 CIO 3207 Allocation possible CIO 3307 Allocated 8 32 0 CIO 3208 Allocated CIO 3308 Allocated 9 see note 3 CIO 3209 Allocated CIO 3309 Allocation possible 10 CIO 3210 Allocated CIO 3310 Allocated 11 32 32 CIO 3211 Allocated CIO 3311 Allocated 12 None None CIO 3212 Not used CIO 3312 Not used 63 None None CIO 3263 Not used CIO 3363 Not used Note 1 The above example is for allocations in a CS CJ series PC Note 2 The Master Unit is not allocated any words so any available node address can be used as node address 7 Note 3 Slaves can be allocated to the words labe
72. performed when a communications fault is detected 0 Decelerates to a stop using C1 02 deceleration time fault detection 1 Coats to a stop fault detection 2 Decelerates to a stop using the C1 09 emergency stop time fault detection 3 Continues operating alarm detection DeviceNet System Startup Chapter 4 Note 1 Be sure to set F9 05 when using flux vector control If used with the default setting 1 unless there is a torque reference torque limit from control remote I O O will be taken as the torque reference torque limit and there will be no torque output Note 2 If F9 06 is set to 3 continues operating the Inverter will continue operating when a commu nications fault occurs according to the contents of settings immediately before Be sure to take any steps necessary to ensure safety such as installing a limit switch or an emergency stop switch Frequency Reference Settings and Display Units e Perform the following settings to specify units for data related to frequencies speeds used in Device Net communications e The standard unit used with DeviceNet is r min so always set the number of motor poles Parameter Set value Contents Default setting No 0 0 01 Hz 1 0 01 max frequency is 100 2 to 39 r min Set the number of motor poles 40 to 3 999 Specifies the value used to set and display the maximum frequency Set a 4 digit value
73. r min 1 800 r min 1 800 x20 1 800 0708 Hex Note 1 Under the DeviceNet protocol the unit for the speed reference is fixed as r min The number of motor poles 2 to 39 must be set in parameter 01 03 frequency reference setting and dis play units when using DeviceNet open network Note 2 If the setting in not within the proper range the previous data will be retained and the desig nated rotational speed will not be entered e Rotational Speed Monitor Data Word address Bit Signal name Rotational speed monitor data Content Communications data Rotational speed monitor x 24 a Speed scale value of Class 2A Instance 01 Attribute 16 Initial value 0 The speed scale is assigned to the message function For instructions on how to change it refer to 5 5 Mes sage Communications e The unit for the rotational speed monitor is set in 01 03 frequency reference setting and display units e Data conversion example When the speed scale value is 0 and the number of motor poles is set in 01 03 and the read data is 03E8 Hex 03E8 Hex 1 000 gt 1 000 2 1 000 r min Note Under the DeviceNet protocol the unit for the speed reference is fixed as r min The number of motor poles 2 to 39 must be set in parameter 01 03 frequency reference setting and display units when using DeviceNet open network 5 1 2 Types of Remote I O Operation There are 4 types of DeviceNet Communications Ca
74. single Object Details Instance Attribute Content Setting Default range Hex Object Software Indicates class 03 software Revision revisions The revision value is advanced whenever there is a change Indicates the set value of the communications node address It is read only because the setting is made by the external setting switch Baud Rate Indicates the baud rate It is write protected because the setting is made by the external setting switch 00 125 Kbps 01 250 Kbps 02 500 Kbps Allocation Information Indicates DeviceNet communications connection information Used to check whether connection is already made e See details below e Cannot be written for ex plicit messages Error is returned 209 Appendix Chapter 8 e Allocation Information Details 1 Remote 1 O connection status 1 Explicit message connection status Node address MAC ID of Master connected for DeviceNet communications Note The Master Unit automatically writes allocation information when the communications connec tion is completed After the Master Unit has written the information writing is prohibited 8 2 4 Assembly Objects Class 04 Hex Assembly objects are objects related to remote I O operations Remote I O operations are configured with these objects for communications Support Service Codes Service Gode No Hey Semice 0E
75. sleep operation 0 0 to 25 5 0 18s 0 0 No delay time b5 17 01B5 01 B5 Accel decel time for PID 0 0 to 25 5 0 18s 0 0 No reference b8 01 01CC 01 CC Energy saving mode Oor1 1 0 No selection b8 04 01CF 01 CF Energy saving coefficient 0 00 to 0 01 Depends No 655 00 on See note capacity b8 05 01D0 01 DO Power detection filter 0 to 2 000 1ms 20 time constant b8 06 01D1 01 D1 Search operation voltage 0 to 100 1 DeviceNet Communications Card Operations Chapter 5 Tuning Parameters Parameter Register Class 64 Hex Setting Setting Default Change No Hex range unit setting during Instance Attribute operation C1 01 0200 02 00 Acceleration time 1 0 0 to 0 1s 10 0 Yes C1 02 0201 02 01 Deceleration time 1 600 0 C1 03 0202 02 02 Acceleration time 2 C1 04 0203 02 03 Deceleration time 2 C1 09 0208 02 08 Deceleration Stop Time C1 11 020A 02 OA Accel decel time 0 0 to 0 1 Hz 0 0 No switching frequency 400 0 C2 01 020B 02 0B S curve characteristic 0 00 to 0 01 s 0 20 No time at acceleration start 2 50 C2 02 020C 02 oc S curve characteristic 0 00 to 0 01 s 0 20 No time at acceleration end 2 50 C4 01 0215 02 15 Torque compensation 0 00 to 0 01 1 00 Yes gain 2 50 C4 02 0216 02 16 Torque compensation Oto 10 000 1ms 200 See No primary delay time note 1 constant C6 02 0224 02 24 Carrier frequency 1toF 1 Depends No selection on capacity C6 03 0225 02 25
76. the Data Write Flag will be turned ON and parameter writing processing will be executed 2 If the data is properly written the written parameter register number and the function code will be returned from the Inverter When the sent register number and the function code agree with the re ceived data contents the Data Agree Flag will be turned ON to send the enter command 3 If the enter command is normally received the register number and function code that agree with the enter command will be returned from the Inverter When the sent register number and function code agree with the received contents the Data Agree Flag will be turned ON to send the function code 00 both the register number and function code are 0000 4 In the same manner if the function code 00 is normally received the Data Agree Flag will be turned ON and the Data Write Completed Flag will be turned ON When the Data Write Completed Flag turns ON the Data Write Flag will turn OFF and the program will stop Note 1 If the enter command remains set data will be repeatedly written to EEPROM Therefore set the function code to 00 both the register number and function code are 0000 which per forms no processing to disable the enter command Note 2 If the sent data is faulty word m bit 7 will be turned ON which will turn ON the Faulty Data Flag and the program will be stopped until the Faulty Data Reset Input Bit 000002 is turned ON 201
77. the destination node with IOWR e C Control Code The control code is set as shown below for DeviceNet Master Units 15 8 7 la c 0 Destination unit address FE Master Unit Master Unit must be set for explicit messages Destination node address 0 to 3F Hex 0 to 63 The Master Unit node address must be set for explicit messages Response setting ON No response OFF Response required Must be OFF response required for explicit messages 97 DeviceNet Communications Card Operations Chapter 5 e S Beginning Source Word Specify the beginning word address for the command data transferred to the DeviceNet Master Unit Preset the data to be transferred in consecutive words as shown in the following table Word ad dress Beginning response storage word Set with the PC s variable area designation method S 1 Example DM 1000 82 DM area 03E8 1000 in hexadecimal 00 fixed at 00 for DM area 0000 Hex gt 2s S 2 Response monitor time 0001 to 028F Hex 0 1 to 65 5 s unit 0 1 s S 3 Number of command data bytes Set in hexadecimal Note Command data is the data set in words S 4 onwards S 4 Command data Set explicit message FINS command 2801 S 5 Node of Slave or Master for transmission Explicit message service code Address 0 to 3F Hex 0 to 63 Write 10 Read 0E S 6 Class ID code Set DeviceNet class code for relevant function Set within
78. there will be no torque output i e the motor will not operate Although the setting range for torque reference torque limit is 300 0 to 300 0 the torque actually output depends on the motor characteristics For a general purpose motor take the range to be 200 0 to 200 0 91 DeviceNet Communications Card Operations Chapter 5 e Monitor Data Signal name Content Output frequency Gives the frequency being output by the Inverter e Monitor unit 0 01 Hz See note 1 monitor Example Output frequency when the monitor value is 1388 Hex 1388 Hex 5000 Dec x 0 01 Hz 50 00 Hz Torque reference Gives the torque reference value inside the Inverter See note 2 monitor e Monitor unit 0 1 100 is motor rated torque Example Torque reference for monitor value of 1F4 Hex 1F4 Hex 500 Dec x 0 1 50 relative to motor rated torque Output current Gives the value of the current being output by the Inverter See note 3 monitor e Monitor unit 0 01 A for Inverters with maximum motor capacity of 7 5 kW 0 1 A for Inverters with maximum motor capacity of 11 kW Example Output current for 0 4 kW 3G3RV Inverter with monitor value of C8 Hex C8 Hex 200 Dec x 0 01 A 2 00 A Note 1 The data setting unit can be changed with 01 03 frequency reference setting display unit Same for 3G3RV 3G3PV and 3G3FV Inverters Note 2 The torque reference monitor is valid only if open loop vecto
79. to directly specify the destination node with CMND 194 194 5 dinb S D c e S Beginning Command Storage Word Specify the beginning word address for the command data transferred to the DeviceNet Master Unit Preset the data to be transferred in consecutive words as shown in the following table Word address S Command data Set explicit message FINS command 2801 S 1 Node of Slave or Master for transmission Explicit message service code Address 0 to 3F hex 0 to 63 Write 10 Read 0E S 2 Class ID code Set DeviceNet class code for relevant function Set within 0001 to 002A 0064 hex with Inverter s DeviceNet Communications Card 3 Instance ID code Set DeviceNet instance code for relevant function S 4 Attribute ID code Attached data for writing Set DeviceNet attribute code for relevant function Attached data for writing e D Beginning Response Storage Word Specify the beginning word address of the area for storing responses to messages 102 DeviceNet Communications Card Operations Chapter 5 e C Beginning Control Code Word Specify the beginning word address of the area for storing the required control codes for message com munications The control codes shown in the following table are required by DeviceNet Master Units Preset the data in consecutive words Word address Number of command data bytes 0000 to OOA0 hex 0 to 160 bytes Set the amount o
80. verter nector and turn ON the Invert er power supply The Card is not connected properly and power is not being to supplied to it Replace the Option Card Note 1 When both of the baud rate setting pins DRO and DR1 are set to ON both the MS and NS will be lit in red Note 2 For communications line problems detailed error codes will be displayed on the indicators of the Master Unit Check the error code and take appropriate countermeasures according to the descriptions in Chapter 15 Troubleshooting and Maintenance of DeviceNet Compo Bus D Operation Manual W267 174 Communications Errors Chapter 6 6 2 Message Communications Errors Explicit Message Errors If an explicit message is sent but communications do not end normally one of the following error codes will be returned with service code 94 Check the meaning of the error message and either correct the message or adjust the timing of the message Meaning Countermeasures 0000 Normal end response O8FF The requested service does not exist Correct the service code and send the data again O9FF An invalid attribute was detected Check and correct the attribute values and send the data again OCFF The requested service cannot be executed in Stop the Inverter and send the data again the current object mode or status OEFF A request has been sent to change an attribute Check and correct the ser
81. will turn OFF when a Master Unit is executing message com munications If the message response is faster than the PC ladder program cycle time the Message Communications Enabled Flag will remain ON and response processing will not be possible Execute the read response processing before IOWR as shown in the following diagram and produce a Mes sage Communications Status Flag d using bit A A DIFU C Cc D Read response processing Message Communications Enabled Flag Execution Message condition Communications Enabled Flag A 25506 Equals Flag Note If the read response processing is executed after IOWR there can be no Message Communica tions Enabled Flag response by means of IOWR so an attempt could be made to read the re sponse even though the message communications have not been completed Communications Flags For CS1 Series Equals Flag The Equals Flag turns OFF when an error occurs in writing a command from the CPU Unit to the Master Unit This Flag turns ON after a command has been written normally from the CPU Unit to the Master Unit Error Flag The Error Flag is OFF when all operands and the control code are legal This Flag turns ON when an illegal operand or control code is set or when there is an error in instruction execution Message Communications The Communications Enabled Flag turns OFF during messages Enabled Flag in the Master Unit communications or when message communications are
82. with this model is Ver 2 0 The software version can be confirmed using the Configurator New Remote I O Function A new remote I O function has been added to the three existing functions basic remote I O standard remote I O and special remote I O The new remote I O called control remote I O contains functional ity and arrays matching the Inverter control terminal I O signals and it provides easy to use specifica tions for reduced wiring Note The control remote I O function does not conform to the AC DC drive profile but is specially set for this product Changes to Remote I O Switching Methods The four types of remote I O functions use explicit messages for switching The following table shows the changed area settings for the remote I O to be set Original area before changes New area after changes Remote input switching Class 100 64 Hex Class 101 65 Hex SYSMAC lt Inverter Instance 01 01 Hex Instance 01 01 Hex Attribute 202 CA Hex Attribute 01 01 Hex Remote output switching Class 100 64 Hex Class 101 65 Hex SYSMAC gt Inverter Instance 01 01 Hex Instance 01 01 Hex Attribute 203 CB Hex Attribute 02 02 Hex Parameter Reading and Writing Using Explicit Messages An event parameter reading and writing function has been added that uses explicit messages Although previously it was necessary to set special remote I O to read and write parameters explicit messages can n
83. 0 Note 1 Note Note Note Note Note O a Ff OON Search operation voltage limiter 0 to 100 0 When the control mode is changed the Inverter will revert to default settings The V F control default setting is given above Tuning Parameters The default setting is 0 1 for V f control with PG The default setting is 2 00 s for Inverters with a capacity of 55 kW or more The setting range for Asian models is 0 to 1 The setting range for Asian models is 0 0 to 300 0 The same capacity as the Inverter can be set by initializing this parameter Parameter Register Class 64 Hex Setting Setting Default Change No Hex z range unit setting during Instance Attribute operation Acceleration time 1 0 0 to 0 1 s E ion ti 6000 0 Set with C1 02 0201 02 01 Deceleration time 1 Set with C1 10 C1 03 0202 02 02 Acceleration time 2 C1 10 C1 04 0203 02 03 Deceleration time 2 C1 05 0204 02 04 Acceleration time 3 C1 06 0205 02 05 Deceleration time 3 C1 07 0206 02 06 Acceleration time 4 C1 08 0207 02 07 Deceleration time 4 C1 09 0208 02 08 Deceleration Stop Time C1 10 0209 02 09 Accel decel time setting Oor1 1 unit C1 11 020A 02 OA Accel decel time 0 0 to 0 1 Hz 0 0 No switching frequency 400 0 C2 01 020B 02 0B S curve characteristic 0 00 to 0 01 s 0 20 No ti
84. 0 m OUT To Slaves block 1 Address LT Address Addresses in ascending Input order starting from 0 gt IN From Slaves block 1 Address At least one byte rightmost is allocated to each address e For slaves with more than 16 inputs or outputs more than one input or output word is allocated to that slave s node address e The rightmost byte is allocated to slaves with less than 16 inputs or outputs Free Allocation With Configurator A Configurator can be used to allocate words in the DeviceNet Master Unit in any order by calling pa rameters of the Master Unit and changing the word allocation of parameters The following allocations are possible when using a Configurator e Output words do not need to be allocated to Input Units only input words e Slaves that require two words can be allocated two words using only one node address so that the next node addresses can be set for another Slave e Remote I O words can be allocated in sequence regardless of the order of the node addresses Note The Configurator uses one node address Therefore the number of Slaves that can be connected is reduced if the Network is to be operated with the Configurator still connected The Configurator can be removed however after the words have been allocated and then another Slave can be 50 DeviceNet System Startup Chapter 4 connected to the Network in its place so that the number of Slaves that ca
85. 01 is examined If an error is found the completion code is stored in D00100 and the command is re executed 3 If the completion code of the response is normal the Message Sent Flag will be turned ON and the Sending Message Flag will be turned OFF Network Configuration This program is based on the following conditions Master unit number 0 Master node address 63 Fixed allocation area setting 1 Network Communications Enabled Flag A20200 Online Flag 151100 Network Communications Error Flag A21900 188 Communications Programs sysMAC CS series PCs Chapter 7 Ladder Program 001000 001001 DIFU G13 001001 001001 BSETIG71 0000 000200 bo0220 430 poogoe 0002 D00200 Equals Flag P_EQ CMF 020 0000 vr D00201 C 402 0001 D00200 D00200 C 402 0004 bo0200 D90200 BCDig24 D00200 D00202 MOVD 083 Do0005 0210 000203 MOVD 083 Do00d6 0012 000203 MOVD 083 Do0006 0210 D00204 Converts command specified in DM Area to CMND data MOVD 083 D00007 0012 D00204 MOVD 083 DO0QOF 0210 D00205 MOVD 083 boo0os 0012 D00205 MOvD 083
86. 018 CPF error 2 Refer to table below Yes No 0019 Alarm 1 Refer to table below Yes No 001A Alarm 2 Refer to table below Yes No 001B to 001F Not used 151 DeviceNet Communications Card Operations Chapter 5 e Inverter Status Register Number 0010 Hex Bit Content During RUN Zero speed Forward reverse 1 Reverse operation During Fault Reset input Frequency agree 1 Inverter operation ready Alarm Fault Not used Bit Content 1 Operation fault 1 EEPROM error 1 Program mode 00 Operator connecting 11 Operator disconnecting Not used e Fault 1 Register Number 0014 Hex Bit Display Content Fuse open Undervoltage main Undervoltage CTL Undervoltage MC Short circuit Ground fault Overcurrent Overvoltage Overheat See note 1 Overheat See note 2 Motor overload Inverter overload Overtorque detection 1 Overtorque detection 2 Braking transistor Braking resistor INIA AJOIN O Note 1 Maximum upper limit temperature was exceeded Note 2 Set temperature was exceeded 152 DeviceNet Communications Card Operations Chapter 5 e Fault 2 Register Number 0015 Hex Display Content External fault 3 External fault 4 External fault 5 External fault 6 External fault 7 External fault 8 Not used Overspeed Speed deviation PG is disconnected Input phase los
87. 0204 01 25 Acceleration time 3 No C1 06 0205 01 26 Deceleration time 3 No C1 07 0206 01 27 Acceleration time 4 No C1 08 0207 01 28 Deceleration time 4 No C1 09 0208 01 29 Emergency stop time No C1 10 0209 Acceleration Oor1 1 1 No deceleration time units C1 11 020A Acceleration decelerati 0 0 to 400 0 0 1 Hz 0 0 No on switching frequency C2 01 020B 01 2A S curve characteristic 0 00 to 2 50 0 01 s 0 20 No time at acceleration start C2 02 020C 01 2B S curve characteristic 0 00 to 2 50 0 01 s 0 20 No time at acceleration end C2 03 020D 01 2C S curve characteristic 0 00 to 2 50 0 01s 0 20 No time at deceleration start C2 04 020E 01 2D S curve characteristic 0 00 to 2 50 0 01 s 0 00 No time at deceleration end C3 01 020F 01 2E Slip compensation 0 0 to 2 5 0 1 1 0 See Yes gain note 2 C3 02 0210 01 2F Slip compensation O to 10 000 1 ms 200 See No primary delay time note 2 C3 03 0211 01 30 Slip compensation 0 to 250 1 200 No limit C3 04 0212 01 31 Slip compensation Oor1 1 0 No during regeneration C3 05 0242 01 32 Flux Calculation Oor1 1 0 No Method C3 06 0243 Output voltage limiting 0 or 1 1 0 No action selection C4 01 0213 01 33 Torque compensation 0 00 to 2 50 0 01 1 00 Yes gain C4 02 0214 01 34 Torque compensation 0 to 10 000 1ms 20 See No delay time note 2 C4 03 0244 Startup torque 0 0 to 200 0 0 1 0 0 No forward operation C4 04 0245 Startup to
88. 0398 03 98 Analog output signal level Oor1 1 0 No for channel 2 F5 01 0399 03 99 Not used 0 No F5 02 039A 03 9A Not used 1 No F5 03 039B 03 9B Not used 2 No F5 04 039C 03 9C Not used 4 No F5 05 039D 03 9D Not used 6 No F5 06 039E 03 9E Not used 37 No F5 07 039F 03 9F Not used OF No F5 08 03A0 03 AO Not used OF No F5 09 03A1 03 Al Not used 0 No F6 01 03A2 03 A2 DeviceNet fault operation Oto3 1 1 No selection F6 02 03A3 03 A3 Communications external Oor1 1 0 No fault input detection meth od selection 128 DeviceNet Communications Card Operations Parameter Register No Hex Class 64 Hex Instance Attribute Communications external fault input operation selec tion Setting range 0to3 Setting unit Chapter 5 Default setting Change during operation Not used Display unit selection for current monitor Note Values in parentheses are for Asian model Inverters External Terminal Function Parameters Parameter Register Class 64 Hex Name Setting Setting Default Change No Hex range unit setting during Instance Attribute operation H1 01 0400 04 00 Terminal S3 function 0 to 68 1 24 No selection H1 02 0401 04 01 Terminal S4 function 0 to 68 1 14 No selection H1 03 0402 04 02 Ter
89. 1 DeviceNet Communications Card Operations Chapter 5 Example 3 Finding the communications data for setting a one minute acceleration time with the follow ing condition set Time scale attribute 1C 3 e Matching the acceleration time unit 1 minute 60 seconds 60 000 ms e Converting acceleration time to minimum unit Acceleration time unit 60 000 1 ms x 1 2 7 500 e Converting communications data to hexadecimal 7 500 dec 1D4C hex e Communications Data Reference Example In this example the hexadecimal value BB8 that has been read is converted to frequency with the fol lowing conditions set Number of poles 01 03 4 Speed scale attribute 16 1 e Converting communications data to decimal BB8 hex 3 000 dec e Converting from minimum unit to r min Communications data x unit 3 000 x 1 r min x 1 21 1 500 r min 5 5 9 Reading and Writing Parameters Class 64 Hex Inverter parameters can be read and written using explicit messages Class 100 Dec 64 Hex has been provided with instances and attributes corresponding to each parameter in the Inverter Send an explicit message to the class instance or attribute of the parameter to be set as described below Parameter Database All parameters in the parameter database have been unified to 1 word 16 bit data Even settings of 0 and 1 will be treated as 1 word 16 bit data in explicit messages Note When sending or receiving 1 word 16 bit
90. 1 03 Flux vector A1 02 3 00 to 03 Speed Actual Rotational Speed Monitor See note 1 Can be referenced in hexadecimal with the output frequency monitor U1 02 minimum unit as 1 The output frequency monitor minimum unit can be set by the frequency reference setting and display units 01 03 01 03 0 0 01 Hz 01 03 1 0 01 100 Max frequency 01 03 2 to 39 1 r min Set number of poles 01 03 40 to 39999 Follow individual set values Setting the attribute 16 speed scale enables a further multiplication factor to be set for 01 03 2 to 39 1 r min Speed Reference Rotational Speed Reference See note 1 Can be set and read in hexadecimal with the frequency reference minimum unit as 1 The frequency reference minimum unit can be set by the frequency reference setting and display units 01 03 01 03 0 0 01 Hz 01 03 1 0 01 100 Max frequency 01 03 2 to 39 1 r min Set number of poles 01 03 40 to 39999 Follow individual set values Setting the attribute 16 speed scale enables a further multiplication factor to be set for 01 03 2 to 39 1 r min 0 to max frequency 109 DeviceNet Communications Card Operations Instance Attribute Current Actual Content Can be referenced in hexadecimal with the output current monitor U1 03 minimum unit as 0 1 A Setting the attribute 17 current scale enables a multiplication facto
91. 1 OUT 2 and IN 2 can be set using a Configurator For each block set the area the start word the number of words allocated to the block and the number of words allocated to each Slave 60 DeviceNet System Startup Chapter 4 Free Allocation Restrictions e Each node address can be set only once in the output blocks and once in the input blocks The same node ad dress cannot be set twice Output block 1 Output block 2 wrona Node 02 Node 02 e f a Configurator is used to freely allocate words or bytes to each Slave only a Slave using only one byte 8 bits can be set in the leftmost byte of the allocated word Slaves with more than 8 bits cannot be set for the leftmost bit of the allocated word Start byte Only one byte can be set 15 0 if the first byte is a left WRONG xX e The same Slave cannot be allocated words in more than one Master Master Master Words must be allocated to a Slave from one Master only Note The master parameter file duplication check from the Configurator can be used to check for node addresses that have been set more than once in the scan list which shows the I O allocations that have been made e Always use the Configurator when there is more than one Master and enable the scan lists A Bus OFF error can occur if there is more than one Master with the scan list disabled on the same Network Free Allocation Restrictions When Usin
92. 1 09 0308 03 08 Min output frequency 0 0 to 0 1 Hz 1 5 See No 400 0 note 3 E1 10 0309 03 09 Min output frequency 0 0 to 0 1 V 9 0 18 0 No voltage 255 0 0 0 See note to 510 0 1 and 3 See note 1 E1 11 030A 03 OA Mid output frequency 2 0 0 to 0 1 Hz 0 0 See No 400 0 note 6 E1 12 030B 03 0B Mid output frequency 0 0 to 0 1 V 0 0 See No voltage 2 255 0 0 0 note 6 to 510 0 See note 1 E1 13 030C 03 oC Base voltage 0 0 to 0 1 V 0 0 See No 255 0 0 0 note 4 to 510 0 See note 1 E2 01 030E 03 0E Motor rated current 0 32 to 0 01 A Depends No 6 40 See on capac note 2 ity E2 02 030F 03 OF Motor rated slip 0 00 to 0 01 Hz Depends No 20 00 on capac ity E2 03 0310 03 10 Motor no load current Depends 0 01 A Depends No on capac on capac ity ity E2 04 0311 03 11 Number of motor poles 2 to 48 1 pole 4 No E2 05 0312 03 12 Motor line to line resis 0 000 to 0 001 Q Depends No tance 65 000 on capac ity E2 06 0313 03 13 Motor leak inductance 0 0 to 40 0 0 1 Depends No on capac ity E2 07 0314 03 14 Motor iron saturation co 0 00 to 0 01 0 50 No efficient 1 0 50 E2 08 0315 03 15 Motor iron saturation co 0 00 to 0 01 0 75 No efficient 2 0 75 E2 10 0317 03 17 Motor iron loss for torque 0 to 65535 1W Depends No compensation on capac ity E2 11 0318 03 18 Motor rated output 0 00 to 0 01 kW Depends No 650 00 on capac ity E3 01 0319 03 19 Motor 2 control method Oto2 1 0 No selection
93. 114 5 6 1 Inputting Control Frequency Read Write 0 00 0 eee eee eee 114 5 6 2 Inverter Monitoring Functions Read 0 0 0 e eee eee eee 115 5 6 3 Parameter Reading and Writing 0 cee eee eee eee 120 5 7 3G3PV Register Numbers Classes Instances and Attributes 0 135 5 7 1 Inputting Control Frequency Read Write 0 0 0 2 eee eee eee 135 5 7 2 Inverter Monitoring Functions Read 0 0 0 cece eee ene 136 5 7 3 Parameter Reading and Writing 0 eee ee eee 141 5 8 3G3FV Register Numbers Classes Instances and Attributes 0 150 5 8 1 Inputting Control Frequency 0 0 cece eee 150 5 8 2 Inverter Monitoring Functions 0 0 0 c eee eee eee eee 151 5 8 3 Parameter Reading and Writing 0 0 cece eee eee 159 CHAPTER 6 Communications Errors cccecceeeeee 71 6 1 Communications Line Errors 0 eee eee n enn eee 172 6 2 Message Communications Errors 0 eect ee eens 175 6 3 Special Remote I O Errors arat cece EAEE A OERE teen een eetaenes 176 624 Tniverter Faults 3 53 ii abet ba Saeed hie bed a diab vhs behead aia 177 CHAPTER 7 Communications Programs SYSMAC CS series PCs 179 7 1 Standard Remote I O Programming 0 0 0 180 7 2 Message Communications Programming 0 0 0 e eee eee eee 183 7 2 1 Inverter Fault Processing
94. 16 and inching frequency reference and 3G3PV Invert ers frequency references 2 to 4 and inching frequency reference d1 02 to d1 17 regardless of the setting of b1 01 e Switching of Frequency References from DeviceNet Communications e There is a switching signal Net Ref for frequency references speed references from the standard remote I O of the DeviceNet Communications Card The input method for frequency references can be changed in the following ways using the Net Ref signal Net Ref 1 ON Automatically sets b1 01 to 3 making frequency references from DeviceNet communications valid remote I O frequency references become valid If Net Ref turns OFF b1 01 will return to the original value Net Ref O OFF The frequency reference specified by b1 01 becomes valid Inverter Operation Command Selection e Select the method for inputting Run and Stop Commands to the Inverter Select the method suitable for the application 65 DeviceNet System Startup Chapter 4 Parameter Set value Contents Default setting No Digital Operator RUN and STOP Keys on the Digital Operator Control circuit Operation command input from terminals control circuit terminals RS 422 485 Operation commands received via communications RS 422A 485 communications Optional Card Operation commands using DeviceNet Communications Card e When operation commands forward reverse stop from t
95. 3 If straight crimp terminals are not used strip the electrical wires to a length of 5 5 mm Note 4 Do not tighten the screws to a torque exceeding 0 5 N m Doing so may damage the terminal block If the screws are too loose however malfunctions or short circuits may result Thin flat blade screwdriver Terminal block TC Gi AAAA O Strip to 5 5 mm if straight crimp terminal is not a used F Wire Straight crimp terminal or unsoldered cable Black Blue White Red mn mn an Do Connecting Communications Cables to T branch Taps For connecting the DeviceNet Communications Card use DCA1 5C10 Thin Cables and branch them from the T branch Tap This is done for reasons of terminal block dimensions and easy maintenance Note 1 Thick Cables cannot be used for this wiring Note 2 As for multi drop wiring use Thin Cables for direct insertion This section shows how to connect a communications cable with a connector attached to a T branch Tap There are two kinds of T branch Taps one makes a single branch and the other makes three branches but the cable connections are the same for both The connectors indicated by asterisks in the following diagrams have the least resistance and these connectors should be used for the trunk line connections When using a T branch Tap on a drop line connect the longest drop line to
96. 32 3G3PV 1537 3G3FV 1516 Allocations Bit 003000 Fault Flag Bit 000000 Fault Code Read Flag Bit 000001 IOWR Write Completed Flag Bit 000002 Response Flag Bit 003003 Sending Message Flag Bit 003002 Message Sent Flag Bit 000100 Reset Input Bit D00000 Slave node address 8G3MV Inverter Response Storage Words D03000 Command Code 2801 D03001 Completion Code D03002 Number of Received Bytes D03003 Node Address Service Code 8E Normal read 94 Error D03004 Read Data or Error Code D00100 _ Error Code for Error Response D00200 Error Code for Inverter Error 183 Communications Programs SYSMAC Cs series PCs Chapter 7 Timing Chart Word m bit 0 Fault Bit 000000 Fault Read Flag 003003 Sending Message Flag 003002 Message Sent Flag CMND instruction execution 000001 CMND Write Completed Flag 000002 Response Flag A20200 Message Communica tions Enabled Flag 003000 Fault Flag 000100 Reset Input Bit D00200 Fault code storage lt S FFaaultcode 1 2 3 Operation 1 When the Inverter has a fault bit O of word m Fault Bit will be turned ON Until the fault is cleared the Fault Flag will be turn ON and this will cause the Fault Read Flag to be turned ON and the com mand specified in the DM Area will be sent using the CMND ins
97. ASL 025 Enabled 0000 Flag 151100 000002 Online Flag CMP 020 A20200 0000 Network Com D03001 munications Enabled Flag JE MOV 021 Equals Flag Da3001 P_EQ D00100 ASR 026 0000 ASR 026 0000 MOV 021 Equals Flag D03004 P_EQ D00200 MOV 021 0000 0000 003002 Executes CMND instruction Confirms execution of CMND instruction The completion code examined If an error is found the command is re executed If the command is executed normally the data is stored in D00200 Communications Programs sysMAC Cs series PCs Chapter 7 7 2 2 Reading Writing Data This programming example writes and reads data using explicit messages Explicit messages can be executed by specifying FINS commands in the DM Area allocated to the PC and sending them using the CMND or IOWR instructions If there is an error in the command the completion code is stored in the DM Area and the command is re executed Allocations Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Note If the written data size is Word set in the order of the rightmost bits and leftmost bits 001000 000000 000001 000002 003000 003001 D00000 D00001 D00002 D00003 D00004 D00005 Program Start Input Bit Message Execution Flag Command Write Flag Response Flag Sending Message Flag Message Sent Flag Slave node address
98. Add the following explicit message processing time when performing explicit message communications sending or receiving Explicit message processing time 0 11 x Tg x n n The number of explicit messages that are sent or received within 1 cycle of the CPU Unit Tg The baud rate factor 500 kbps Tg 2 250 kbps Tg 4 125 kbps Tp 8 COS Cyclic Connection Communications Time Add the following COS cyclic connection communications time COS cyclic connection communications time 0 05 0 008 x S x Tg x n S The total number of input and output bytes for COS cycle connections Tg The baud rate factor 500 kbps Tp 2 250 kbps Tg 4 125 kbps Tp 8 n The number of nodes for which COS cyclic connections occur within 1 cycle of the CPU Unit More than One Master in Network Calculate the communications cycle time according to the above equation for the Slaves of each Master Unit The communications cycle time for the entire network is the sum of communications cycle times for each Master Unit 217 Appendix Chapter 8 I O Response Time of Inverter The following shows processing time between the Inverter and the DeviceNet Communications Card e DP RAM processing time between the Inverter and DeviceNet Communications Card 5 ms e Inverter input scanning 5 ms read twice e Inverter output scanning 5 ms e Inverter parameters scanning 20 ms Inverter I O response time Ladder program cycle time Communications cy
99. Appendix Chapter 8 8 1 Specifications Item Specifications Model 3G3FV PDRT1 SINV1 Remote I O e Basic remote I O Allocated 2 input and 2 output words e Standard remote I O default setting Allocated 2 input and 2 output words e Special remote I O Allocated 3 input and 3 output words e Control remote I O Allocated 4 input and 4 output words Note 1 The user can select from among these four types of remote I O Note 2 Basic and standard remote I O are compatible with DeviceNet Special remote I O and control remote I O are applicable only to this product and is not compatible with DeviceNet Explicit messages A maximum of 32 bytes of data can be sent or received Note Explicit messages are applicable to the AC DC drive profile Communications power supply 11 to 25 VDC 20 mA max specifications Internal circuit power supply Provided from Inverter Operating location Indoors with no corrosive gases oil mist metallic particles etc Operating ambient temperature 10 to 45 C Operating ambient humidity 90 RH max with no condensation Storage temperature 20 to 60 C Area 1 000 m max Weight 150 g max 206 Appendix Chapter 8 8 2 Objects There are eight types of object e Identify objects identification information Class 01 hex e Message router objects Class 02 hex e DeviceNet objects Class 03 hex e Assembly objects Class 04 hex e Device
100. C5 02 021C 02 1C ASR integral I time 1 0 000 to 0 001 s 0 200 Yes 10 000 C5 03 021D 02 1D ASR proportional P 0 00 to 0 01 0 02 Yes gain 2 300 00 C5 04 021E 02 1E ASR integral l time 2 0 000 to 0 001 s 0 050 Yes 10 000 C5 05 021F 02 1F ASR limit 0 0 to 20 0 0 1 5 0 No C6 01 0223 02 23 CT VT selection Oor1 1 1 No C6 02 0224 02 24 Carrier frequency OtoF 1 Depends No selection on capac ity C6 03 0225 02 25 Carrier frequency upper 2 0 to 15 0 0 1 kHz Depends No limit See notes on capac 2 and 3 ity C6 04 0226 02 26 Carrier frequency lower 0 4 to 15 0 0 1 kHz Depends No limit See notes on capac 2 and 3 ity C6 05 0227 02 27 Carrier frequency 00 to 99 1 00 No proportional gain See note 3 Note Note Note Note 124 2 The setting range depends on the capacity of the Inverter 4 These parameters are not supported by the Asian models 1 When the control mode is changed the Inverter will revert to default settings The V f control default setting is given above 3 These parameters can be monitored or set only when 1 is set for C6 01 and F is set for C6 02 DeviceNet Communications Card Operations Chapter 5 Reference Parameters Parameter Register Class 64 Hex Name Setting Setting Default Change No Hex range unit setting dur
101. Card Operations Chapter 5 e S Beginning Command Storage Word Specify the beginning word address for the command data transferred to the DeviceNet Master Unit Preset the data to be transferred in consecutive words as shown in the following table Word address Command data Set explicit message FINS command 2801 Node of Slave or Master for transmission Explicit message service code Address 0 to 3F Hex 0 to 63 Write 10 Read 0E Class ID code Set DeviceNet class code for relevant function Set within 0001 to 002A or 0064 Hex with Inverter s DeviceNet Communications Card Instance ID code Set DeviceNet instance code for relevant function Attribute ID code Attached data for writing Set DeviceNet attribute code for relevant function Attached data for writing e D Beginning Response Storage Word Specify the beginning word address of the area for storing responses to messages e C Beginning Control Code Word Specify the beginning word address of the area for storing the required control codes for message com munications The control codes shown in the following table are required by DeviceNet Master Units Preset the data in consecutive words Word address Bits 15 14 to 8 7to0 C Number of command data bytes 0000 to OOAO Hex 0 to 160 bytes Set the amount of data from the beginning S word C 1 Number of response data bytes 0000 to OOAO Hex 0 to 160 by
102. Communications Programs SYSMAC Cs series PCs Chapter 7 Ladder Program 000000 Write Parameter Input Bit 003010 000101 DIFU 013 MOV 021 000001 FF10 D00205 MOV 021 00FD D00206 MOV 021 0000 D00207 000001 000103 003010 003000 003000 000103 MOV 021 0000 0001 Sets enter command MOV 21 000001 0001 0001 000102 000100 BSET 071 0000 D00200 D00209 Sets 00 function 000100 003001 ANDW 034 000101 D00000 FF00 000102 D00200 ORW 035 003001 XFER 070 0002 D00205 D00200 0010 D00205 ANDW 034 D00000 00FF D00201 ANDW 034 D00001 FF00 D00202 ORW 035 D00201 D00202 D00206 ANDW 034 D00001 00FF D00207 Continued on the next page Sets write data 202 Communications Programs sysMAC Cs series PCs Chapter 7 From previous page 003001 003002 003003 003010 Data error processing Equals Flag P_EQ Word m bit 7 000002 CMP 020 D00205 Equals Flag P_EQ oO 003002 CMP 020 D00208 D00209 003003 ASL 025 0001 003010 MOV 021 0000 0001 XFER 070 0002 D00205 203 sm tb Ml Chapter 8 e Appendix gt 8 1 Specifications 8 2 Objects 8 3 DeviceNet Communications Response Time 205
103. F9 04 039C Not used 1 0 F9 05 039E Not used Oor1 1 1 F9 06 039F DeviceNet operation Oto 3 1 1 No selection Note 1 When the control mode is changed the Inverter will revert to default settings The open loop vector control default settings are given above Note 2 Within the setting range 1 to 38 4 10 11 12 13 14 25 28 34 and 35 cannot be set and 29 to 31 are not used External Terminal Function Parameters Parameter Register Class 64 Hex Setting range Setting Default Changes No Hex unit setting during Instance Attribute operation Multi function input 1 24 terminal 3 selection Multi function input 2 14 terminal 4 selection Multi function input 3 3 0 See terminal 5 selection note 1 Multi function input 4 4 3 See terminal 6 selection note 1 Multi function input 5 6 4 See terminal 7 selection note 1 Multi function input 6 8 6 See terminal 8 selection note 1 Multi function contact 0 output terminal 9 to 10 Multi function output 1 terminal 25 Multi function output 2 terminal 26 166 DeviceNet Communications Card Operations Chapter 5 Parameter Register Class 64 Hex Setting range Setting Default Changes No Hex unit setting during
104. G speed deviation detection time DEV 0 0 to 10 0 Number of PG gear teeth 1 Number of PG gear teeth 2 0 to 1 000 PG disconnection detection time 0 0 to 10 0 Analog Reference Card selection Oor1 Digital Reference Card input selection O0to7 Channel 1 output monitor selection 1 to 38 See note 2 Channel 1 gain 0 00 to 2 50 165 DeviceNet Communications Card Operations Chapter 5 Parameter Register Class 64 Hex Setting range Default Changes No Hex A setting during op Instance Attribute eration F4 03 0391 Channel 2 output 1 to 38 See note 1 3 No monitor selection 2 F4 04 0392 Channel 2 gain 0 00 to 2 50 0 01 0 50 Yes F4 05 03A0 Channel 1 bias 10 0 to 10 0 0 1 0 0 Yes F4 06 03A1 Channel 2 bias 10 0 to 10 0 0 1 0 0 Yes F5 01 0393 Not used 0 F5 02 0394 Not used 1 F6 01 0395 ce S Not used 0 ei F7 01 0396 Output pulse multiple O to 4 1 1 No selection F8 01 0398 Operation detection O0to3 1 1 No communications error SYSMAC BUS F9 01 0399 Communications Oor1 1 0 No external fault input selection F9 02 039A Communications Oor1 1 0 No external fault input detection selection F9 03 039B Communications O0to3 1 1 No external fault input operation selection
105. G3RV 3G3PV 3G3FV Inverters and setting and reading all parameters These operations have been developed independently and are not part of the DeviceNet standard Note 3G3RV Inverters support special remote I O from version VSF105091 Asian models Version VSF105081 5 3 1 Overview of Special Remote I O Special remote I O operations utilize DeviceNet remote I O and can directly write to and read from in ternal Inverter registers Basically the register numbers for the various functions shown on this and sub sequent pages are specified for writing or reading Once data has been written it is retained until it is changed by the next write operation Words Used for Special Remote I O e Outputs SYSMAC PC to Inverter Instance ID 100 Dec 64 Hex Byte number Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Wd n Rightmost 0 Function code write read code Leftmost 1 Register number leftmost byte register number allocated to each parameter etc Wd n 1 Rightmost 2 Register number rightmost byte register number allocated to each parameter etc Leftmost 3 Register data leftmost byte data to write to specified register Wd n 2 Rightmost 4 Register data rightmost byte data to write to specified register e Outputs Inverter to SYSMAC PC Instance ID 150 Dec 96 Hex Wd m Rightmost 0 Function code returns transmitted code Leftmost 1 Register number leftmost byte returns transmitte
106. Get attribute single 10 Set attribute single Object Details Instance Attribute Content Setting Default range Hex 00 01 Object Software Indicates class 04 software 0001 Yes No Word Revision revisions The revision value is advanced whenever there is a change 14 03 Remote I O data Operation is the same as See 00 00 Yes Yes Byte x 4 for basic remote I O note 1 00 00 output 15 03 Remote I O data Operation is the same as See 00 00 Yes Yes Byte x 4 for standard remote I O note 1 00 00 output 46 03 Remote I O data Operation is the same as 00 00 Yes No Byte x 4 for basic remote I O input 00 00 47 03 Remote I O data Operation is the same as 00 00 Yes No Byte x 4 for standard remote I O 00 00 input 64 03 Remote I O data Operation is the same as See 00 00 Yes Yes Byte x 5 for special remote I O note 1 00 00 output 00 65 03 Remote I O data Operation is the same as See 00 00 Yes Yes Byte x 8 for control remote I O note 1 00 00 output 00 00 00 00 96 03 Remote I O data Operation is the same as 00 00 Yes No Byte x 5 for special remote I O 00 00 input 00 97 03 Remote I O data Operation is the same as 00 00 Yes No Byte x 8 for control remote I O 00 00 input 00 00 Note 1 The setting ranges are the same as the respective remote I O setting ranges 210 Appendix Chapter 8 Note 2 The remote I
107. Hex Name Setting Setting Default Change No Hex range unit setting during Instance Attribute operation H4 03 041F 04 1F Bias terminal FM 110 0 to 0 1 0 0 Yes 110 0 10 0 to 10 0 See note 3 H4 04 0420 04 20 Monitor selection 1 to 40 1 3 No terminal AM H4 05 0421 04 21 Gain terminal AM 0 0 to 0 1 50 0 0 50 Yes 1000 0 0 01 See See note 0 00 to note 3 3 2 5 See note 3 H4 06 0422 04 22 Bias terminal AM 110 0 to 0 1 0 0 Yes 110 0 10 0 to 10 0 See note 3 H4 07 0423 04 23 Analog output 1 signal Oto2 Oor 1 0 No level selection 1 See note 3 H4 08 0424 04 24 Analog output 2 signal Oto2 Oor 1 0 No level selection 1 See note 3 H5 01 0425 04 25 Slave address 0 to 20 1 1F No See note 2 H5 02 0426 04 26 Communication speed Oto 4 1 3 No selection H5 03 0427 04 27 Communication parity Oto2 1 0 No selection H5 04 0428 04 28 Stopping method after Oto3 1 3 No communication error H5 05 0429 04 29 Communication error Oor1 1 1 No detection selection H5 06 042A 04 2A Send wait time 5 to 65 1 ms 5 No H5 07 042B 04 2B RTS control ON OFF Oor1 1 1 No H6 01 042C 04 2C Pulse train input function Oto 2 1 0 No selection H6 02 042D 04 2D Pulse train input scaling 1000 to 1 Hz 1440 Yes 32000 H6 03 042E 04 2E Pulse train input gain 0 0 to 0 1 100 0 Yes 1000 0 H6 04 042F 04 2F Pulse train input bias 100 0 to 0 1 0 0 Yes 100 0 H6 05 0430 04 30 Pulse train input filter 0 00 to 0 01 s 0 10
108. I O Operation Control Remote I O Operation Message Communications DeviceNet Explicit Messages 3G3RV Register Numbers Classes Instances and Attributes 3G3PV Register Numbers Classes Instances and Attributes 3G3FV Register Numbers Classes Instances and Attributes 73 DeviceNet Communications Card Operations Chapter 5 N Caution Do not carelessly change Inverter s settings Doing so may result in injury or dam age to the product N Caution Be sure to perform the setting switch settings correctly and confirm the settings be fore starting operation Not doing so may result in malfunction or damage to the product 5 1 Remote I O There are two types of DeviceNet communications Remote I O and message communications There are 4 types of remote I O operation Basic remote I O standard remote I O special remote I O and control remote I O This section explains standard remote I O operations and the types of remote I O Note To use special remote I O or control remote I O it is necessary to switch the remote I O operation Switching the remote I O operation involves the use of message communications so refer to 5 2 Switching Remote I O Operation and 5 5 Message Communications Also for details regarding special remote I O refer to 5 3 Special Remote I O 74 DeviceNet Communications Card Operations Chapter 5 5 1 1 Standard Remote I O Initial Setting The type of remote I O operation pre set as t
109. Message Communications Enabled Flag m Message Response Read Timing Have messages read with the rising edge of the Network Communications Enabled Flag for each com munications port Network Communications bled FI Enabled Flag Communications Flags Type Name Network Communications Enabled Flag bt Address T CMND 490 s Read response processing Content Word Bit 0 Execution disabled executing 1 Execution enabled not executing Network Communications Error Flag 0 Normal end 1 Abnormal end Master Unit Online Flag status flags 25 x Unit number 1511 0 Offline 1 Online Message Communications Enabled Flag 96 25 x Unit number 1524 Indicates the same status as the Online Flag 0 Offline 1 Online This function is compatible with C200HW DRM21 V1 DeviceNet Communications Card Operations Chapter 5 5 5 3 Sending and Receiving Messages with C200HW DRM21 V1 DeviceNet Master Unit IOWR for CS1 Series With a C200HW DRM21 V1 DeviceNet Master Unit explicit messages are sent using IOWR To send an explicit message it is necessary to place FINS command 2801 in front and to send the command to the Master Unit The Master Unit that receives the command converts the command data to an explicit message and transfers it to the destination node When sending an explicit message it is not possible to directly specify
110. Net connection objects Class 05 hex e Motor data objects Class 28 e Control supervisor objects Class 29 hex e AC DC drive objects Class 2A hex For details on motor data objects control supervisor objects and AC DC drive objects refer to 5 5 6 Motor Data Objects Class 28 Hex through 5 5 8 AC DC Drive Objects Class 2A Hex 8 2 1 Identify Objects Identification Information Class 01 Hex Identify objects are objects that provide DeviceNet product information All of this information is read only Support Service Codes Service Code No Hey Sewise 0E Get attribute single 05 Reset return to initial status 207 Appendix Chapter 8 Object Details Instance Attribute Content Setting Default range Hex Object Software Indicates class 01 software Revision revisions The revision value is advanced whenever there is a change Vender ID Indicates the maker s code OMRON 47 2F hex Device Type Indicates the DeviceNet profile classification The Inverter corresponds to the AC DC Drive e Master Unit 0 e AC DC Drive 2 Product Code Assigned to each series by each maker DeviceNet Communications Card 52 34 hex or 57 39 hex or 58 34 hex Revision Indicates overall software revisions for the DeviceNet Communications Card Status Indicates the communications status of the DeviceNet Communications Card See details below Serial Number Indicates the prod
111. O operations are the same as those explained in 5 1 Remote I O and 5 3 Special Remote I O Operation Note 3 Remote I O can be performed by means of message communications When a normal re mote I O communications connection is established however the message communications cannot be used for that purpose Even if an attempt is made to use message communications they will be overwritten by remote I O inputs 211 Appendix Chapter 8 8 2 5 DeviceNet Connection Objects Class 05 Hex DeviceNet connection objects are objects related to information and operations involving DeviceNet communications connections The Master Unit uses the information and operations of these objects to execute the initial processing for communications Support Service Codes Service Gode No Hey Sewe 0E Get attribute single Set attribute single 10 Object Details Instance Attribute Object Software Revision Content Indicates class 05 software revisions The revision value is advanced whenever there is a change Setting range Default Hex 01 Explicit message 212 Indicates the status of this object instance 00 Does not exist in network or is not ready 01 In network state waiting for connection event from Master Unit 02 Waiting for connection ID attribute writing 03 Connection completed 04 Timeout Must be 93 when commu nications are es tab lished Inst
112. OMRON Mi USER S MANUAL DeviceNet CompoBus D Communications Card MODEL 3G3FV PDRT1 SINV1 For SYSDRIVE 3G3RV 3G3PV and 3G3FV Inverters ii Thank you for choosing a SYSDRIVE 3G3RV 3G3PV 3G3FV Inverter and DeviceNet Communications Card This manual describes the specifications and operating methods of the DeviceNet Communications Card used for exchanging data between an Inverter and a Programmable Controller Specifically it describes the operation methods communications methods and data setting methods of the 3G3FV PDRT1 SINV1 DeviceNet Communications Card Proper use and handling of the product will help ensure proper product performance will length product life and may prevent possible accidents Please read this manual thoroughly and handle and operate the product with care For details about the 3G3RV 3G3PV 3G3FV Inverter and DeviceNet communications system refer to the following manuals SYSDRIVE 3G3RV User s Manual 1532 SYSDRIVE 3G3PV User s Manual 1537 SYSDRIVE 3G3FV User s Manual 1516 DeviceNet Unit Operation Manual W380 DeviceNet CompoBus D Operation Manual W267 NOTICE This manual describes the functions of the product and relations with other prod ucts You should assume that anything not described in this manual is not possible The name SYSMAC in this manual refers to the SYSMAC CS Cu series C200HX HG HE and CV series Programmable Controllers that can be conne
113. Output Slaves with 8 or Less Bytes of Output TRT 0 016 x Tp x Sout 0 11 x Tp 0 07 Sout1 The number of Output Slave output words Tg The baud rate factor 500 kbps Tg 2 250 kbps Tg 4 125 kbps Tp 8 Input Slaves with 8 or Less Bytes of Input Trt 0 016 x Tp x Sint 0 06 x Tp 0 05 Sint The number of Input Slave input words Tp The baud rate factor 500 kbps Tg 2 250 kbps Tg 4 125 kbps Tp 8 Mixed I O Slaves with 8 or Less Bytes of Both Input and Output TRT 0 016 x Tp x Sout2 Sino2 0 11 x Tg 0 07 Sout2 The number of Mixed I O Slave output words Sino The number of Mixed I O Slave input words Tp The baud rate factor 500 kbps Tg 2 250 kbps Tp 4 125 kbps Tp 8 216 Appendix Chapter 8 Slaves with More than 8 Bytes of Input or Output or Both Trt Tou x Tpyte in X Bin x Tayte out x Bout TOoH Protocol overhead TpyTeE IN Input byte transmission time Bin Number of input bytes Tpyte out Output byte transmission time Bout Baud rate Number of output bytes 0 306 ms TBYTE IN 0 040 ms TBYTE OUT 0 036 ms 0 542 ms 0 073 ms 0 069 ms 1 014 ms 0 139 ms 0 135 ms Note Calculate with Bour 0 for Slaves with inputs only and B y O for Slaves with outputs only High density Unit Processing Time Add 3 5 ms if there is at least 1 Slave with more than 8 bytes of input or output or both Explicit Message Processing Time
114. Page 5 24 Information on switching remote I O operation changed in several places Page 5 30 Information on reading and writing parameters added and graphic corrected Page 6 7 Catalog number corrected Chapter 7 Extensive changes made throughout the chapter to provide examples for CS series PCs Page 8 2 Minor changes made to table and three changed to four Page 8 6 Information added to table Page 8 11 Equations added 219 A AC DC drive objects 105 109 details 109 alarms 154 allocation areas 14 fixed allocation 53 free allocation 59 assembly objects 105 details 210 service codes 210 At Frequency Bit 180 basic remote I O inputs 78 outputs 78 baud rate 11 restrictions 20 settings 38 C communications cable shielding 32 distance 20 explicit messages 3 fault processing 183 190 flags 102 functions 3 line noise 31 power supply 11 18 22 noise prevention 32 suspension 33 specifications 11 with Configurator 14 with SYSMAC PCs 2 14 without Configurator 14 communications data reference examples 112 setting examples 111 Communications Error Flag 192 Communications Error Reset Input Bit 192 Communications Fault Reset Input Bit 191 communications flags 96 104 Index communications line errors operation indicators 172 Configurator 6 7 3G8E2 DRM21 10 3G8F5 DRM21 10 communications 14 overview 9 specifications 10
115. Replace the Option Card MS Green Lit The Card is operating normally Flashing Initial settings or necessary preparations Turn ON the Inverter power for communications are incomplete supply again Replace the Option Card Red Lit A fatal error hardware error has occurred Turn ON the Inverter power in the Card supply again Replace the Option Card Flashing A non fatal error such as a switch setting Check the baud rate setting error has occurred Turn ON the Inverter power supply again Replace the Option Card Not lit Power is not being supplied from the In Check the Option Card con verter nector and turn ON the Invert The Card is not connected properly and Power supply power is not being to supplied to it Replace the Option Card 172 Communications Errors Indicator Display Color Status Meaning The DeviceNet Network is operating nor mally Communications connections estab lished Chapter 6 Countermeasures Flashing The Network is normal but the commu nications connection with the Master Unit is not established Turn ON the power supply again after the following steps e Register in the scan list e Turn ON the power supply to the Master Unit A fatal communications error has oc curred A DeviceNet communications error was detected caused by node address duplica tion or Bus OFF These errors make com munications impos
116. Response Read Timing Have messages read with the rising edge of the Network Communications Enabled Flag for each com munications port Network Communications Enabled Flag l C Response ready t processing 103 DeviceNet Communications Card Operations Chapter 5 Communications Flags Address Content Word Bit Network Communications Port 7 0 Execution disabled executing Enabled Flag Port 6 Port 5 Port 4 Port 3 Port 2 Port 1 Port O Network Communications 15 Port 7 0 Normal end Error Flag 14 Port 6 13 Port 5 12 Port 4 11 Port 3 10 Port 2 9 Port 1 8 Port O Master Unit Message Communications 25 x Unit 12 0 Communications error detected status flag Enabled Flag number Master Unit message communica 1501 tions not possible 1 Execution enabled not executing 1 Abnormal end 1 Master Unit communications pos sible 5 5 5 Overview of Messages and Responses When message communications are used the Inverter s DeviceNet Communications Card returns re sponses as explained below Basically DeviceNet communications are executed in 1 byte 8 bit units In the case of single word data 16 bits the rightmost bits least significant and the leftmost bits most significant are reversed in order due to the following reasons e Data on communications line is transmitted in the order of rightmost bits and leftmost bits e Data that is internally pro
117. Ro Ny x 0 005 x l4 L2 x Re No x 0 005 x lo Ln x Re Nn x 0 005 x In S 4 65 V Li The distance m of the trunk line between the power supply and node i Re Maximum cable resistance for approx 1 m Thick Cable 0 015 Q m Thin Cable 0 069 Q m Ni The number of T branch Taps on the trunk line between the power supply and node i li The consumption current required for the communications power supply for node i 0 005 Q The contact resistance of the T branch Taps Note 1 If there are nodes on both sides of the power supply the formula is used to calculate the best location in each direction and if the conditions are satisfied then the locations are valid The conditions are satisfied if the following equations are true Voltage drop V on trunk line at left side 4 65 V Voltage drop V on trunk line at right side 4 65 V Note 2 The above formulae are for the communications power supply For Unit power supplies per form calculations according to the power supply specifications of the Units e Calculation Example Terminating Resistor Trunk line Trunk line Terminating Resistor 5 wire cable 5 wire cable 3m z max il I l Communications power supply Node Node Node 40m ll 40m ale 4om 40m
118. SYSMAC CS Cv series includes the CS1G CS1H and CJ1G Programmable Control lers The SYSMAC CV Series includes the CV1000 CV2000 and CVM1 Programmable Controllers SYSMAC C200HS PCs support only remote I O communications Multi vendor Network DeviceNet conforms to the DeviceNet open field network specification which means that devices Mas ters and Slaves produced by other manufacturers can also be connected to the Network The Device Net Communications Card supports the DeviceNet AC DC drive object Choice of Communications Functions The DeviceNet Communications Card has various functions to choose from to suit the Inverter applica tions e Remote I O Communications Either basic remote I O control or special remote I O can be chosen for remote I O allocation to suit the application Special I O control can be used to control and set all functions for 3G3RV 3G3PV 3G3FV series Inverters e Message Communications Basic Inverter control and monitoring is possible with DeviceNet explicit messages which are defined for AC DC driver objects Remote I O and message communications can be used simul taneously i e remote I O control can be performed at the same time as other control using mes sage communications Functions and System Configuration Chapter 1 Applicable to Various System Configurations Remote I O communications and message communications are available as communications func tions Normal control inputs are
119. Scan List Disabled Mode all Slaves are targeted for remote I O communications Slaves that are connected to the network while communications are in progress are also targeted for communications Errors cannot be confirmed however even if there are slaves present that did not start up due to equipment failure for example because there is no scan list available to check communications against The communications cycle time will also be significantly longer than the calculated value Note 3 The scan list is automatically enabled when free allocations are set using the allocated DM Area words or the Configurator If the list is subsequently cleared using a software switch the fixed allocations that were used when the list was disabled will be used for remote I O commu nications Make sure the system has stopped before disabling the scan list with a Master Unit that is set for free allocations In particular when multiple Master Units are connected to a single network communications will not be performed normally if one Master Unit on the net work is operating with the scan list disabled Also once the list is disabled the free allocations data registered in the Master Unit is lost 4 1 3 Fixed Word Allocations Allocation Areas for Different PCs If fixed allocations are used the node addresses and the words allocated to them are determined ac cording to the PC or Master Unit used The remote I O allocation area consists of the input area
120. Setting unit Default setting Change during operation Autotuning mode selection 0 to 2 See note 2 0 Motor output power 0 00 to 650 00 0 40 Motor rated voltage 0 to 255 0 0 0 to 510 0 See note 1 200 0 400 0 See note 1 Motor rated current 0 32 to 6 40 See note 3 Depends on capacity Motor base frequency 0 to 400 0 See note 4 60 0 Number of motor poles 2 to 48 1 pole Note Note 2 Note 3 Note 4 134 Motor base speed 0 to 24000 1 Values in parentheses are for 400 V class Inverters 1 r min Set T1 02 and T1 04 when T1 01 is set to 2 This setting 2 is only possible for V f control or V f control with PG The setting range is from 10 to 200 of the Inverter rated output current The value for a 200 V class 0 4 kW Inverter is given The upper setting limit will be 150 0 Hz when C6 01 is set to O DeviceNet Communications Card Operations Chapter 5 5 7 3G3PV Register Numbers Classes Instances and Attributes 5 7 1 Inputting Control Frequency Read Write Register No Contents Hex 0000 Reserved 0001 Frequency reference Bit O Run stop command 1 Run 0 Stop Bit 1 Reverse stop command 1 Reverse 0 Stop Bit 2 Multi function input command 3 Bit 3 Multi function input c
121. The default setting depends upon the type of Inverter The value for a 200 V class 0 4 kW Inverter is given above 170 Chapter 6 e Communications Errors 6 1 Communications Line Errors 6 2 Message Communications Errors 6 3 Special Remote I O Errors 6 4 Inverter Faults 171 Communications Errors Chapter 6 6 1 Communications Line Errors Malfunctions in DeviceNet communications that are a result of broken wires short circuits reversed wiring duplicate node address assignments or noise interference are detected as transmission BUS errors When a transmission error is detected the Inverter s Fault Bit will turn ON and the motor will coast to a stop For Inverters with a software version of 1042 or later the operation when a communica tions error occurs can be set using constant F9 06 When an error is detected perform error processing according to the indicator display of the DeviceNet Communications Card Operation Indicators The DeviceNet Communications Card has 4 operation indicators that show the status of the power and communications Indicator Display Meaning Countermeasures Color Status PWR Green Lit Power is being supplied from the Inverter to the Card Not lit Power is not being supplied from the In Check the Option Card con verter nector and turn ON the Invert The Card is not connected properly and Power supply power is not being supplied to it
122. Turn ON the Scan List Enable Bit in the software switches bit 0 Remote I O communications will start with the scan list enabled The software switches can be used to start and stop remote I O communications Do nothing if the scan list was enabled at startup and the scan list does not need to be changed Remote I O communications will start with the scan list enabled The software switches can be used to start and stop remote I O communications Go to step 11 DeviceNet System Startup Chapter 4 11 Confirm that the MS and NS indicators on all Master Units and Slaves are lit 12 Switch the PC to RUN mode Note 1 With the CS1W DRM21 or CJ1W DRM21 if the slave function is being used switch to the master function by turning ON the Master Enable Switch Note 2 This operation is not required with the CVM1 DRM21 V1 or C200HW DRM21 V1 because there is only one fixed allocation area 4 1 4 Free Allocations Allocation Areas and Maximum Words for Different PCs and Master Units When free allocations are used the remote I O areas consist of IN blocks which input Slave data to the PC and OUT blocks which output data from the PC to the Slaves These blocks can be allocated as desired using the following words Each block however must consist of continuous words within one data area e CS1W DRM21 and CJ1W DRM21 Master Units PC CS CJ Series all models Setting method Set using allocated DM Area Set using Configurator words
123. Yes time 2 00 H6 06 0431 04 31 Pulse train monitor 1 2 5 20 1 2 Yes selection 24 36 H6 07 0432 04 32 Pulse train monitor 0 to 32000 1 Hz 1440 Yes scaling Note 1 The values in parentheses indicate initial values when initialized in 3 wire sequence Note 2 Set H5 01 to 0 to disable Inverter responses to RS 422A 485 communications Note 3 Values in parentheses are for Asian model Inverters 130 DeviceNet Communications Card Operations Chapter 5 Protective Function Parameters Parameter Register Class 64 Hex Name Setting Setting Default Change No Hex range unit setting during Instance Attribute operation L1 01 0480 04 80 Motor protection O0to3 1 1 No selection L1 02 0481 04 81 Motor protection time 0 1 to 5 0 0 1 min 1 0 No constant L1 03 0482 04 82 Alarm operation selection 0 to 3 1 3 No during motor overheating L1 04 0483 04 83 Motor overheating Oto2 1 1 No operation selection L1 05 0484 04 84 Motor temperature input 0 00 to 0 01 s 0 20 No filter time constant 10 00 L2 01 0485 04 85 Momentary power loss Oto2 1 0 No detection L2 02 0486 04 86 Momentary power loss 0 to 2 0 0 1s Depends No ridethru time on capacity L2 03 0487 04 87 Min baseblock time 0 1 to 5 0 0 1s Depends No on capacity L2 04 0488 04 88 Voltage recovery time 0 0 to 5 0 0 1s Depends No on capacity L2 05 0489 04 89 Undervoltage detect
124. abling Parameter Data Using the ENTER Command To enable parameter data that has been received send an ENTER command as shown in the following table to either store or not store the parameters in EEPROM To enable a series of data for more than one transmission send only one ENTER command after sending all of the data Data type ENTER command that writes parameters to EEPROM Transmission Write 0000 as follows Class 100 Dec 64 Hex Instance 255 Dec FF Hex Attribute 253 Hex FD Hex Inverter Operation Previously received parameter setting data is stored in EEPROM Note The maximum number of write operations that can be performed to EEPROM is 100 000 Remarks Used to store data even after a power interruption ENTER command that does not write parameters to EEPROM Write 0000 as follows Class 100 Dec 64 Hex Instance 255 Dec FF Hex Attribute 221 Hex DD Hex Previously received parameter setting data is enabled as operating data without storing it to EEPROM Parameter Classes Instances and Attributes If there is frequent rewriting of data do not send ENTER commands each time because of the limit to the number of times EEPROM can be written Be sure to send an ENTER command that writes data to EEPROM once before the power supply is interrupted Refer to 5 6 3G3RV Register Numbers Classes Instances and Attributes 5 7 3G3PV Register Num bers Classes Ins
125. age reference for secondary current Monitors U1 26 0 1 V units 200 400 VAC 100 with sign Voltage reference for excitation current Monitors U1 27 0 1 V units 200 400 VAC 100 with sign CPU ID Monitors U1 28 q axis ACR output Monitors U1 32 0 1 units motor s rated secondary current 100 with sign d axis ACR output Monitors U1 33 0 1 units motor s rated secondary current 100 with sign OPE error parameter Monitors U1 34 outputs parameter PID input quantity Monitors U1 36 0 01 units max frequency 100 with sign PID output quantity Monitors U1 37 0 01 units max frequency 100 with sign 118 PID reference Monitors U1 38 0 01 units max frequency 100 DeviceNet Communications Card Operations Register No Hex RS 422A 485 communications error Chapter 5 Contents Monitors U1 39 Bit O CRC error Bit 1 Invalid data length Bit 2 Not used Bit 3 Parity error Bit 4 Overrun error Bit 5 Framing error Bit 6 Time out Bits 7 to 15 Not used Fan operating time Monitors U1 40 1 hr units Current fault Monitors U2 01 Code Code Error display Error display Error display 01 PUF OE OL4 1C LF 02 UV1 OF RR 1D OH3 03 UV2 10 RH 1E OPR 04 UV3 11 EF3 1F ERR 06 GF 12 EF4 20 OH4 07 OC 13 EF5 22 BUS 08 OV 14 EF6 25
126. ain circuit DC 1V Yes No voltage 0088 U2 09 Fault output power 0 1 kW Yes No 0089 U2 10 Fault torque reference 0 1 Yes No 008A U2 11 Fault input terminal status Bits O to 7 terminals 1 to Yes No 8 008B U2 12 Fault output terminal status Same as for U1 11 on Yes No previous page 008C U2 13 Fault operating status Same as for U1 12 on Yes No previous page 008D U2 14 Fault elapsed time 1 hour Yes No 0090 U3 01 Content of last fault Refer to table below Yes No 0091 U3 02 Content of 2nd prior fault Refer to table below Yes No 0092 U3 03 Content of 3rd prior fault Refer to table below Yes No 0093 U3 04 Content of 4th prior fault Refer to table below Yes No 0094 U3 05 Elapsed time since last 1 hour Yes No fault 0095 U3 06 Elapsed time since 2nd 1 hour Yes No prior fault 0096 U3 07 Elapsed time since 3rd 1 hour Yes No prior fault 0097 U3 08 Elapsed time since 4th 1 hour Yes No prior fault 157 DeviceNet Communications Card Operations Chapter 5 e Error Codes Display Content 01 PUF Fuse open 02 UV1 Undervoltage main 03 UV2 Undervoltage CTL 04 UV3 Undervoltage MC 05 SC Short circuit 06 GF Ground fault 07 OC Overcurrent 08 OV Overvoltage 09 OH Overheat See note 1 OA OH1 Overheat See note 2 OB OL1 Motor overload oC OL2 Inverter overload oD OL3 Overtorque detection 1 OE OL4 Overtorque dete
127. al S5 function 0 to 6A 1 3 0 See No selection note1 H1 04 0403 04 03 Terminal S6 function 0 to 6A 1 4 3 See No selection note H1 05 0404 04 04 Terminal S7 function 0 to 6A 1 6 4 See No selection note1 H2 01 040B 04 0B Terminal M1 M2 Select 0 to 38 1 0 No H2 02 040C 04 oc Terminal M3 M4 select 0 to 38 1 1 No H3 02 0411 04 11 Gain terminal A1 0 0 to 0 1 100 0 Yes 1 000 0 H3 03 0412 04 12 Bias terminal A1 100 0 to 0 1 0 0 Yes 100 0 H3 08 0417 04 17 Multi function analog Oor2 1 2 No input terminal A2 signal level selection H3 09 0418 04 18 Multi function analog Oto 1F 1 0 No input terminal A2 function selection H3 10 0419 04 19 Gain terminal A2 0 0 to 0 1 100 0 Yes 1 000 0 H3 11 041A 04 1A Bias terminal A2 100 0 to 0 1 0 0 Yes 100 0 H3 13 041C 04 1C Terminal A1 A2 switching 0 or 1 1 No H4 01 041D 04 1D Monitor selection 1 to 40 1 No terminal FM H4 02 041E 04 1E Gain terminal FM 0 0 to 0 1 100 0 Yes 1 000 0 H4 03 041F 04 1F Bias terminal FM 110 0 to 0 1 0 0 Yes 110 0 H4 04 0420 04 20 Monitor selection 1 to 40 1 3 No terminal AM H4 05 0421 04 21 Gain terminal AM 0 0 to 0 1 50 0 Yes 1 000 0 H4 06 0422 04 22 Bias terminal AM 110 0 to 0 1 0 0 Yes 110 0 146 DeviceNet Communications Card Operations Chapter 5 Parameter Register Instance Attribute Setting Setting Default Change No Hex range unit se
128. als S1 to S7 Output terminal status Monitors U1 11 Bit 0 Terminals M1 and M2 1 ON Bit 1 Terminals M3 and M4 1 ON Bits 2 to 6 Not used Bit 7 Terminals MA and MC 1 ON Bits 8 to F Not used Operating status Monitors U1 12 Bit O During RUN Bit 1 Zero speed Bit 2 Forward reverse 1 Reverse operation Bit 3 During fault reset input Bit 4 Frequency agree Bit 5 Operation ready Bit 6 Alarm minor fault Bit 7 Fault Bits 8 to F Not used Cumulative operation time Monitors U1 13 1 hr units FLASH ID software No Monitors U1 14 138 Frequency reference voltage Terminal A1 input value Monitors U1 15 0 1 units 100 10 V with sign for voltage setting DeviceNet Communications Card Operations Register No Hex Multi function analog input Terminal A2 input value Chapter 5 Contents Monitors U1 16 0 1 units 100 20 mA or 100 10 V with sign for voltage setting Not used Output frequency after a soft start Monitors U1 20 0 01 Hz units with sign Not used PID feedback Monitors U1 24 0 01 units input corresponding to max frequency 100 with sign Not used CPU ID Monitors U1 28 Not used OPE error parameter Monitors U1 34 outputs parameter PID input quantity Monitors U1 36 0 01 units max frequency 100
129. amount of noise on the communications line is too great the interference will alter the communications signal data and communications will be impossi ble Communications lines are more sensitive and require higher speeds than normal I O lines so be sure that noise does not interfere with communications Use the preventative noise countermeasures described here when configuring the system to ensure smooth system start up 2 4 2 Grounding the Network Grounding the Network The DeviceNet Network must be grounded at only one location so that a ground loop is not created The ground should also be connected as close as possible to the center of the Network Connect the cable shield to the ground terminal on the communications power supply and then connect to a ground of 100 Q max as shown in the following diagram Power Supply Tap V l V CAN H CAN H Shield Shield Communications v Vy Ground Va terminal FG V V Communications power supply Ground 100 Q max If more than one communications power supply is connected to the same Network ground only the one nearest the center of the Network Do not connect the shield wire at the other power supplies Note 1 Always ground the communications cable shield at one and only one location in the Network Note 2 Always ground to 100 Q or less Note 3 Always use a separate ground Never use the same ground as for Inverters or other drive system devices
130. an be up to Each block can be up to 100 words including The total 100 words including unused unused areas number of areas The total number of words in all four blocks words in all The total number of words in must be 300 words or less including unused four blocks all four blocks must be 400 areas must be 80 words or less words or less If message communications are used the including total number of words in all four blocks must unused be 100 words or less areas Note 1 The Data Memory DM Area cannot manipulated by bit so it is not suitable as the remote I O allocation area for the Inverter Note 2 If a CPU Bus Link is used with a CV series PC the G Area is used for the CPU Bus Link mak ing it impossible to use this area for DeviceNet communications m Output area Input area Start word Input block 1 Start word Output block 1 A P No of words No of words gt allocated oc allocated oc cupied cupied J Start word Outputblock2 Start word Inputblock2 No of words No of words gt allocated oc allocated oc cupied cupied aoe ee D _ J Note 1 OUT 1 and IN 1 can be set using the allocated DM Area words For each block set the area the start word and the number of words allocated to each Slave Note 2 OUT 1 IN
131. an even larger control system e I O area words can be flexibly allocated for remote I O communications e More than one Master Unit can be mounted to a single PC e More than one Master Unit can be connected in a single Network Fixed Allocation Configuration without a Configurator CS1W DRM21 CJU1W DRM21 C200HW DRM21 V1 CVM1 DRM21 V1 DeviceNet Master Unit r a SYSDRIVE 3G3RV 3G3PV 3G3FV Slave Slave Slave Inverter 3G3FV PDRT1 SINV1 z DeviceNet Communications Card f CS CJ series PCs 64 nodes max including the Master Unit CV series PCs 64 nodes max including the Master Unit C200HX HG HE PCs 64 nodes max including the Master Unit C200HS PCs 33 nodes max including the Master Unit Note 1 The Master Unit occupies one node of the DeviceNet Network Note 2 If C200HS PCs are used only remote I O communications are possible Note 3 If one node uses more than one word the maximum number of nodes will be reduced by one node for each extra word that is used Functions and System Configuration Chapter 1 Free Allocation Configuration with a Configurator CS1W DRM21 CJ1W DRM21 C200HW DRM21 V1 or CVM1 DRM21 V1 DeviceNet Master Unit 3G8F5 DRM21 ISA Board f mm or T s SG8E2 DRM21 PC Card C Configurator Cocd
132. ance type Indicates the type of object instance 00 Explicit message 01 Remote I O Transport class trigger Indicates the communications configuration for the DeviceNet Communications Card Produced connection ID Consumed connection ID Indicates the label used for the communications header for the DeviceNet Communications Card Note These are set when the communications connection is made Initial comm characteristics Indicates the communications configuration for the DeviceNet Communications Card Produced connection size Indicates the maximum number of bytes for transmission Consumed connection size Indicates the maximum number of bytes for reception Instance 01 Explicit message Attribute Expected packet rate Content Indicates the length of the internal processing timeout when a communications request is received Incremented by 10 ms units Setting range Default Hex Chapter 8 Watchdog time out action Indicates the action for internal processing timeout related to communications 00 Retain timeout status until reset or cleared 01 Cut connection automatically 02 Operate again with same connection as is Produced connection path length Indicates number of bytes of data for produced connection path No data for explicit messages Produced connection path Indicates the da
133. ault Change No Hex range setting during Instance Attribute operation L5 01 049E 04 9E Number of auto restart 0 to 10 1 0 No attempts L5 02 049F 04 OF Auto restart operation Oor1 1 0 No selection L6 01 04A1 04 Al Torque detection 0to8 1 0 No selection 1 L6 02 04A2 04 A2 Torque detection level 1 0 to 300 1 150 No L6 03 04A3 04 A3 Torque detection time 1 0 0 to 10 0 0 1s 0 1 No L6 04 04A4 04 A4 Torque detection 0to8 1 0 No selection 2 L6 05 04A5 04 A5 Torque detection level 2 0 to 300 1 150 No L6 06 04A6 04 A6 Torque detection time 2 0 0 to 10 0 O 1s 0 1 No L7 01 04A7 04 A7 Forward drive torque limit 0 to 300 1 200 No L7 02 04A8 04 A8 Reverse drive torque 0 to 300 1 200 No limit L7 03 04A9 04 AQ Forward regenerative 0 to 300 1 200 No torque limit L7 04 04AA 04 AA Reverse regenerative 0 to 300 1 200 No torque limit L8 01 04AD 04 AD Protect selection for Oor1 1 0 No internal DB resistor L8 02 04AE 04 AE Overheat pre alarm level 50 to 130 1 C Depends No on capacity L8 03 04AF 04 AF Operation selection after O to 3 1 3 No overheat pre alarm L8 05 04B1 04 B1 Input open phase Oor1 1 1 0 See No protection selection note 4 L8 07 04B3 04 B3 Output open phase Oor1 1 0 No protection selection L8 09 04B5 04 B5 Ground protection Oor1 1 1 No selection L8 10 04B6 04 B6 Cooling fan control Oor1 1 0 No selection L8 11 04B7 04 B7 Cooling fan control delay 0 to 300 1s 60 No time L8 12 04B8 04 B8 Ambient temp
134. cations subject to exposure to water oil or chemicals e Locations subject to shock or vibration Do not allow foreign objects to enter inside the product Doing so may result in fire or malfunction Do not apply any strong impact Doing so may result in damage to the product or malfunction xi N Caution N Caution N Caution Caution Be sure to wire correctly and securely Not doing so may result in injury or damage to the product Be sure to firmly tighten the screws on the terminal block Not doing so may result in fire injury or damage to the product Carefully handle the product because it uses semiconductor elements Careless handling may result in malfunction Take appropriate and sufficient countermeasures when installing systems in the fol lowing locations Not doing so may result in equipment damage e Locations subject to static electricity or other forms of noise e Locations subject to strong electromagnetic fields and magnetic fields e Locations subject to possible exposure to radioactivity e Locations close to power supplies Operation and Adjustment Precautions N Caution N Caution Do not carelessly change Inverter s settings Doing so may result in injury or dam age to the product Be sure to perform the setting switch settings correctly and confirm the settings be fore starting operation Not doing so may result in malfunction or damage to the product l Mh Chapter
135. cessed by PC for issuing commands is transmitted in the order of leftmost bits and rightmost bits Therefore reverse the order for attributes where Word is written in the Size column in the tables on subsequent pages and create attached data or read response data Note There is no need to take this into consideration for remote I O because the rightmost bits and leftmost bits are automatically reversed Command Format 28 01 32 bytes max Command code Destination Service Class ID Instance ID Service data attribute No or at FINS command for PC node address code tribute No and write data 104 DeviceNet Communications Card Operations Chapter 5 Response Format e Normal Response 28 01 00 00 32 bytes max Command code Completion code Number of bytes Destination Service Service data read data FINS command for PC transmitted node address code e Error Response 28 01 00 00 94 2 bytes Command code Completion code Number of bytes Destination Service Error code FINS command for PC transmitted node address code e Failure or Timeout During Transmission 28 01 Command code Completion code FINS command for PC FINS error code 5 5 6 Motor Data Objects Class 28 Hex This and subsequent sections provide details on objects There are eight types of e Iden
136. changed using the current scale in Class 2A Instance 1 Attribute 17 Inverter rated output current 10 to 120 See note 1 Motor Rated Voltage The motor s rated voltage can be set and read The setting unit is 1 V The setting unit can be 0 to 255 V 0 to 510 V See note 2 changed using the voltage scale in Class 2A Instance 1 Attribute 1B Note 1 The default setting for the motor s rated current depends on the Inverter model Example 1 90A 0013 hex for 200 V class 0 4 kW Note 2 The figures enclosed in parentheses in the Setting range and Default columns are the val ues for 400 V class Inverters 5 5 7 Control Supervisor Objects Class 29 Hex Control supervisor objects are objects that have Inverter control I O related functions They are as signed according to their particular control I O functions such as forward operation reverse operation error detection and so on Be careful when setting up a remote I O communications connection These functions are shared with similar functions used for remote I O so even if they have been set for mes sage operations they may get rewritten for remote I O Support Service Codes Service Code No Hex Service OE Get attribute single 10 Set attribute single 05 Reset attribute Turns OFF the Forward Operation and Reverse Operation inputs and turns ON the Fault Reset Then turns OFF the Fault Reset wh
137. cle time DP RAM processing time 5 ms Inverter I O scanning Inverter internal processing fee 15 ms gt Maximum input response 5ms be gt Maximum output response Note 1 The internal processing time varies depending on the controls to be executed Note 2 Input scanning for parameter reading or writing requires 20 ms 218 Revision History A manual revision code appears as a suffix to the catalog number on the front cover of the manual Cat No 1525 E1 02 L Revision code The following table outlines the changes made to the manual during each revision Page numbers refer to the previous version Revision code June 1998 Revised content Original production September 2001 The following changes were made throughout the manual Information related to 3G3RV and 3G3PV Inverters was added and specific model numbers changed to Inverter V1 was added to the model number CompoBus D was removed or changed to DeviceNet where appropriate CS1 Series was changed to CS Series or CS CJ Series where appropriate information related to CS CJ series Devi ceNet Units and CJ series PCs was added and IOWR changed to CMND where applicable In addition the following changes were made Preliminary Pages The order of the preliminary pages was changed and precautionary in
138. communications between multiple groups of PCs and Slaves The maximum number of nodes connected to one Network remains at 64 One Slave can be connected to no more than one Master Unit e More than one Master Unit per PC Remote I O can be allocated for each Slave of the Master Unit from the Configurator so more than one Master Unit can be mounted to the same PC Note In allocating Remote I O for each Master Unit be careful not to allow any dual allocation Configurator Specifications WS02 CFDC1 E 3G8F5 DRM21 3G8E2 DRM21 Personal computer Desktop model Notebook model Components Installation disk Installation disk software Installation disk software software Dedicated ISA Board Dedicated PCMCIA Card DeviceNet Interface Unit Operating Hardware Computer IBM PC AT or compatible environment CPU Windows NT 166 MHz Pentium min Memory 32 MB min Hard disk 15 MB min free space OS Windows 95 98 2000 or NT 4 0 DeviceNet No accessories Dedicated ISA Board Dedicated PCMCIA Card interface DeviceNet Interface Unit Relation to Network Operates as one node on the Network requires one node address and only one Configurator can be connected to the Network The Configurator can be disconnected from the Network after remote I O has been allocated 10 Functions and System Configuration Chapter 1 1 4 3 DeviceNet Communications Specifications Item Specifications Communicati
139. cted to a DeviceNet System C200HS Programmable Controllers support only the re mote I O function Although care has been given in documenting the product please contact your OMRON representative if you have any suggestions on improving this manual The product contains potentially dangerous parts under the cover Do not attempt to open the cover under any circumstances Doing so may result in injury or death and may damage the product Never attempt to repair or disassemble the product We recommend that you add the following precautions to any instruction manuals you prepare for the system into which the product is being installed e Precautions on the dangers of high voltage equipment e Precautions on touching the terminals of the product even after power has been turned off These terminals are live even with the power turned off Specifications and functions may be changed without notice in order to improve product performance Items to Check Before Unpacking Check the following items before removing the product from the package e Has the correct product been delivered i e the correct model number and speci fications e Has the product been damaged in shipping e Are any screws or bolts loose e Have all accessories been delivered together with or attached to the product Notice OMRON products are manufactured for use according to proper procedures by a qualified operator and only for the purposes described
140. ction 2 OF RR Braking transistor 10 RH Braking resistor 11 EF3 External fault Terminal 3 12 EF4 External fault Terminal 4 13 EF5 External fault Terminal 5 14 EF6 External fault Terminal 6 15 EF7 External fault Terminal 7 16 EF8 External fault Terminal 8 17 Not used 18 OS Overspeed 19 DEV Speed deviation 1A PGO PG is disconnected 1B PF Input phase loss 1C LF Output phase loss 1D Not used 1E OPR OPR disconnected 1F ERR EEPROM error 21 to FF Not used Note 1 Maximum upper limit temperature was exceeded Note 2 Set temperature was exceeded 158 DeviceNet Communications Card Operations Chapter 5 5 8 3 Parameter Reading and Writing The following tables show the SYSDRIVE 3G3FV Inverter parameters and the corresponding register numbers Write and read the various parameters with 1 as the minimum setting unit Negative num bers are expressed as two s complement If the setting unit is in hexadecimal there is no need to con vert it When writing data in parameters be sure to send an enter command to enable the written data Unless the enter command is transmitted the data will not be enabled and the Inverter may not start Parameters for Initialize Mode Parameter Register Class 64 Hex Setting range Setting unit Default Changes No Hex setting during Instance Attribute operation A1 00 0100 Display Language Oto6 A1 01 0101 Access Level Oto4 A1 02 0102 Select Contr
141. ctor Power Supply Tap Power Supply Tap y Y Y Master Master E E PS Slave PS Slave PS Slave PS When there is only one power supply When there are two or more power supplies 34 Chapter 3 Setup and Wiring 3 1 Nomenclature and Settings 3 2 Installation and Wiring 35 Setup and Wiring Chapter 3 3 1 Nomenclature and Settings 3 1 1 Names of Parts Operation indicators PWR indicator MS indicator NS indicator WD indicator Terminal block TC Node address and baud rate setting pins Shielded grounding cable 3 1 2 Terminal Block The following table provides details of the terminal block connected to the communications line Display Sticker color Code Cable color Details 1 Black V Black Communications power supply ground 2 Blue CANL Blue Communications data low side 3 SG Shield Shield connection 4 ol White CAN H White Communications data high side Red V Red Communications power supply 24 VDC Bris aie as SOY 8 8 SF T NN Oo FT H Black Blue White Red i d ml 36 Setup and Wiring Chapter 3 3 1 3 Operation Indicators The DeviceNet Communications Card has 4 op
142. d EFO Detection Select the detection method used for the communications external fault input from communications DeviceNet Communications Card 0 Faults always detected 1 Faults detected only while running i e when Run Commands are input Communications external fault input operation EFO Fault Action Select the Inverter operation performed when there is a communications external fault EFO input from communications DeviceNet Communications Card 0 Decelerates to a stop using C1 02 deceleration time fault detection 1 Coats to a stop fault detection 2 Decelerates to a stop using the C1 09 emergency stop time fault detection 3 Continues operating alarm detection Not used Trace Sample Tim Do not set 83G3PV Inverters do not have this parameter Current monitor display unit selection Current Unit Sel Select the display unit for monitoring the current Always set this parameter to 0 when using a DeviceNet Communications Card 0 A ampere display 1 100 8192 Note If F6 01 is set to 3 continues operating the Inverter will continue operating when a communica tions fault occurs according to the contents of settings immediately before Be sure to take any steps necessary to ensure safety such as installing a limit switch or an emergency stop switch 67 DeviceNet System Startup Chapter 4 Frequency Reference Settings and Display Units
143. d 0 to 9 999 A1 05 0105 05 Password setting 0 to 9 999 A2 01 to A2 32 Application Parameters Parameter 0106 to 0125 Register No Hex 06 to 25 Class 64 Hex Instance Attribute User parameter settings Name Reference selection 0180 to 0510 Set the register numbers for b1 01 to 02 11 Setting range O0to4 Setting unit Default setting Change during operation switching to remote mode b1 02 0181 01 81 Operation method Oto3 1 1 No selection b1 03 0182 01 82 Stopping method Oto3 1 0 No selection b1 04 0183 01 83 Prohibition of reverse Oor2 See 1 0 No operation note 6 b1 06 0185 01 85 Read sequence input Oor1 1 1 No twice b1 07 0186 01 86 Operation selection after O or 1 1 0 No Run command selection in programming modes Oor1 b2 01 0189 01 89 Zero speed level DC 0 0 to 10 0 0 1 Hz 0 5 No injection braking starting frequency b2 02 018A 01 8A DC injection braking 0 to 100 1 50 No current b2 03 018B 01 8B DC injection braking time 0 00 to 0 01 s 0 00 No at start 10 00 b2 04 018C 01 8C DC Injection braking time 0 00 to 0 01 s 0 50 No at stop 10 00 b3 01 0191 01 91 Speed search selection O0to3 1 2 See No current detection or note 1 speed calculation b3 02 0192 01 92 Speed search operating 0 t
144. d by ODVA AC DC drive objects Switching via connection objects is possible only when using a CS1W DRM21 or CJ1W DRM21 Master Unit Set the remote I O connection path used for the scan list with the Configurator At communications startup Slave communications are started from the Master Unit with the connection path set in the scan list Connection Objects for Switching Remote I O Operations To switch remote I O operations by this method the appropriate instance IDs must be set for the con nection path in the following connection objects e Switching remote I O inputs Inverter to SYSMAC PC Produced connection path Class 05 Hex Instance 02 Hex Attribute 14 Hex e Switching remote I O outputs SYSMAC PC to Inverter Consumed connection path Class 05 Hex Instance 02 Hex Attribute 16 Hex Remote I O Instance ID The instances to be set are shown in the following table Instance ID Remote I O type Basic remote I O Inputs Inverter to PC 70 Dec 46 Hex Outputs PC to Inverter 20 Dec 14 Hex Standard remote I O 71 Dec 47 Hex 21 Dec 15 Hex Special remote I O 150 Dec 96 Hex 100 Dec 64 Hex Control remote I O 151 Dec 97 Hex 101 Dec 65 Hex Restrictions on Switching Remote I O To switch remote I O operations maintain either of the following conditions and send an explicit mes sage e Remote I O communications stopped after the remote I O connection and explicit message c
145. d level applications can be supported by combining valve devices sensors and other devices Simultaneous Remote I O and Message Services Remote I O communications to constantly exchange I O data between the PC and Slaves can be executed simultaneously with message communications to send receive Master Unit data as required by the application Therefore a DeviceNet Network can be installed to flexibly handle applications that require both bit data and message data Message communications can be achieved either by using OMRON s FINS commands or by using DeviceNet explicit messages Connect Multiple PCs to the Same Network A Configurator sold separately can be used to enable connection of more than one Master to the Net work allowing message communications between PCs and between multiple groups of PCs and Slaves This allows the DeviceNet Network to be used as a common bus to unify controls while reducing wiring Handle Multi point Control and Line Expansions with Multi layer Networks A Configurator sold separately can be used to enable mounting more than one Master Unit to a single PC allowing control of many more points This feature can easily handle line expansions and other ap plications 6 Functions and System Configuration Chapter 1 Free Remote I O Allocation A Configurator sold separately can be used to enable flexible allocation of I O i e in any area and in any order This allows I O allocations tha
146. d register number Wd m 1 Rightmost 2 Register number rightmost byte returns transmitted register number Leftmost 3 Register data leftmost byte returns transmitted data amount or reads data Wd m 2 Rightmost 4 Register data rightmost byte returns transmitted data amount or reads data Note 1 Special remote I O outputs and inputs are paired When using special remote I O be sure to set them together Note 2 Special remote I O objects do not conform to the AC DC drive profile but are specially set for this product Note 3 The 16 bit data register number and register data is set in two words for each setting Function Codes The special remote I O function codes are shown in the following table Note that they are different from the explicit message service codes Function code hex Content Data writing Data reading No execution data wrapping only no internal processing takes place 84 DeviceNet Communications Card Operations Chapter 5 Setting Data for Operations and Parameter Read data and write data to be set for operations and parameters are calculated as shown below and then transmitted in hexadecimal e Convert to hexadecimal values with the operation parameter minimum setting value as 1 e Negative numbers are expressed as two s complements e f the original data is already displayed in hexadecimal it is transmitted as is e Set bits that are not used to
147. e d2 01 0289 01 4C Reference frequency 0 0 to 110 0 0 1 100 0 No upper limit d2 02 028A 01 4D Reference frequency 0 0 to 109 0 0 1 0 0 No lower limit d3 01 028B 01 4E Jump frequency 1 0 0 to 400 0 0 1 Hz 0 0 No d3 02 028C 01 4F Jump frequency 2 No d3 03 028D 01 50 Jump frequency 3 No d3 04 028E 01 51 Jump frequency width 0 0 to 20 0 0 1 Hz 1 0 No d4 01 028F 01 52 Reference frequency Oor1 1 0 No hold function selection d4 02 0290 01 53 Trim control level 0 to 100 1 25 No d5 01 0291 01 54 Torque control selection O or 1 1 0 No d5 02 0292 01 55 Torque reference delay 0 to 1 000 ims 0 No time d5 03 0293 01 56 Speed limit selection 1or2 1 1 No d5 04 0294 01 57 Speed limit 120 to 120 1 0 No d5 05 0295 01 58 Speed limit bias 0 to 120 1 10 No d5 06 0296 01 59 Speed torque control 0 to 1 000 1ms 0 No switching timer Motor Constant Parameters Parameter Register No Hex Class 64 Hex Instance Attribute Input voltage setting Setting range 155 to 255 155 to 510 Default setting Setting unit 200 400 Changes during operation Motor selection O0to2 0 V f pattern selection Oto F F Maximum frequency FMAX 40 0 to 400 0 60 0 Maximum voltage VMAX 0 0 to 255 0 0 0 to 510 0 200 0 400 0 Maximum voltage frequency FA 0 0 to 400 0 60 0 Intermediate frequency FB 0 0 to 400 0 3 0 See note 2
148. e terminals input Not used Do not set Optional Card Operation commands using DeviceNet Communications Card e When operation commands forward reverse stop from the DeviceNet communications are to be always used set to 3 e Switching of Operation Commands from DeviceNet Communications e There is a switching signal Net Ctrl for operation commands from the standard remote I O of the DeviceNet Communications Card The input method for operation commands can be changed in the following ways using the Net Ctrl signal Net Ctrl 1 ON Automatically sets b1 02 to 3 making frequency references from DeviceNet communications valid remote I O frequency references become valid If Net Ctrl turns OFF b1 02 will return to the original value Net Ctrl O OFF The frequency reference specified by b1 02 becomes valid DeviceNet Communications Settings The parameters below are for functions that are exclusive to DeviceNet communications Set these parameters according to the desired application Parameter Name Contents Setting Default No Operator display range setting Communications external fault Select the type of input used for input input type the communications external fault input from communications DeviceNet Communications Card EFO Selection 0 N O input external fault detected when 1 1 N C input external fault detected when 0
149. e IDs for connection objects When using an OMRON Master Unit set the remote I O instance IDs for parameter objects using the Master Unit s message functions or the Configurator When using a CS1W DRM21 or CJ1W DRM21 Master Unit the connection object at communications startup can be specified using the Configurator Set the connection path from the Configurator Switching via Parameter Objects Using the Configurator To switch remote I O operations using parameter objects the appropriate instance IDs must be set for the following parameter objects e Switching remote I O inputs Inverter to SYSMAC PC Class 101 Dec 65 Hex Instance 01 Dec 01 Hex Attribute 01 Dec 01 Hex e Switching remote I O outputs SYSMAC PC to Inverter Class 101 Dec 65 Hex Instance 01 Dec 01 Hex Attribute 02 Dec 02 Hex The instances to be set are shown in the following table Instance ID Remote I O type Basic remote I O Inputs Inverter to PC 70 Dec 46 Hex Outputs PC to Inverter 20 Dec 14 Hex Standard remote I O 71 Dec 47 Hex 21 Dec 15 Hex Special remote I O 150 Dec 96 Hex 100 Dec 64 Hex Control remote I O 151 Dec 97 Hex 101 Dec 65 Hex The procedure for switching remote I O operations by means of parameter objects using the Configura tor is as follows 1 Connect the Inverter and a Configurator to the DeviceNet communications network At least a Devi ceNet Communicat
150. e Slaves currently participating in the network and operate with this scan list enabled Slaves that are not participating in the network when this Switch is turned ON are not registered and so check that all the necessary Slaves are participating Note If the Master Enable Switch is turned ON when the master function is enabled or Scan List Clear Switch is turned ON when the scan list is disabled a C2 error will be generated to indicate a soft ware setting error e CVM1 DRM21 V1 or C200HW DRM21 V1 Master Units Fixed allocation is executed using the software switches in the area allocated to the Master Unit according to the following procedure 1 Put the CPU Unit in PROGRAM mode Allocation cannot be executed if the CPU Unit is not in PROGRAM mode Be sure to put the CPU Unit in PROGRAM mode 2 Turn ON the Scan List Clear Switch Disable any scan list that has been created When the scan list is cleared all scan list data is lost and so make a backup copy if required 3 Turn ON the Scan List Enable Switch The Master Unit will create and store a scan list based on information from all the Slaves currently participating in the network and operate with this scan list enabled Slaves that are not participating in the network when this Switch is turned ON are not registered and so check that all the necessary Slaves are participating u I O Allocations and Errors A setup error may occur when the scan list is disabled or a verification err
151. e branch The maximum length of a drop line is 6 m It is possible to make a second ary branch from a drop line 20 DeviceNet Communications Line Design Chapter 2 Total Drop Line Length The total drop line length is the total sum length of all the drop lines but not including the trunk line Do not exceed the maximum total drop line length even when the length of each individual drop line is 6 m or less The standard for the total drop line length varies with the baud rate as shown in the previous table Configuration Example The following configuration example shows the maximum length of the Network the drop line lengths and the total drop line length Trunk line Trunk line Trunk line m 10m 20m Terminating Resistor Terminating Resistor 6m Drop line Drop line Drop line Drop line 2m 5m 6m 6m Maximum Network The longest distance between nodes is 48 m and the distance between the two Length Terminating Resistors is 40 m The maximum Network length is therefore 48 m Drop Line Length There are four branch points in the trunk line The length of each drop line is shown in the diagram The maximum drop line length is 6 m Total Drop Line Length The sum of all the drop lines is 40 m
152. e from drop line drop line Multi drop Trunk line Trunk line Trunk line Trunk line Trunk line ee line T branch Tap Nod lode T branch Tap Drop line Node Various forms of connection can be used on the same Network as shown in the following diagram Any number of nodes up to 63 can be connected onto a single drop line Note Design the Inverter wiring for T branch wiring purposes using Thin Cables Communications power supply 24 VDC Trunk line Trunk line Terminating Power Supply Tap Terminating Resistor or T branch Tap Resistor Drop line Drop line 19 DeviceNet Communications Line Design Chapter 2 2 2 Network Configuration Restrictions DeviceNet communications are designed to meet a wide range of applications by providing a choice of baud rates and allowing different combinations of T branch and multi drop connections The restric tions of DeviceNet communications that are required to enable the various communications possibili ties are described here 2 2 1 Baud Rate and Communications Distance The maximum length of the DeviceNet communications cables is restricted by the baud rate and the type of cable used The three types of restrictions on D
153. e limit DB resistor protection Oor1 Inverter overheat 50 to 130 detection pre alarm level Operation after Inverter overheat pre alarm Input open phase protection selection Output open phase protection selection Ground fault protection operation selection Low speed carrier frequency reduction selection 2 Low speed Inverter overload OL2 characteristic selection Note 1 Values in parentheses are for 400 V class Inverters Note 2 The default setting depends upon the type of Inverter The value for a 200 V class 0 4 kW Inverter is given above 169 DeviceNet Communications Card Operations Chapter 5 Operator Parameters Parameter Register Class 64 Hex Setting range Setting Default Changes No Hex unit setting during op Instance Attribute eration Monitor selection 4 to 38 Monitor selection after 1 to 4 power on Frequency reference 0 to 39 999 setting and display units V f pattern setting units Not used Local Remote Key Oor1 Stop Key Oor1 User constant initial Oto 2 values Inverter capacity 0 to FF See selection note Frequency reference Oor1 setting method Operation selection Oor1 when Digital Operator is disconnected Cumulative operation 0 to 65 535 time setting Cumulative operation 0 or 1 time selection Factory use Note
154. e master parameters for each Master Unit and save the parameters in files Turn ON the power supply to one PC i e to one of the Master Units Switch the PC to PROGRAM mode Read the Network configuration from the Configurator Read the master parameter file for the Master Unit that has been turned ON from the master param eter editing screen Write the master parameters created in the above step 19 Turn OFF the power supply to the PC i e the Master Unit and the Slaves Repeat the above steps beginning at step 20 for all Master Units Turn ON the power supply to all Masters and Slaves Go to step 32 Switch the PC to PROGRAM mode See note Set the Master User Allocations Tables for the allocated DM Area words in each Master Unit Turn ON the Master User Allocations Switch for each Master Unit Remote I O communications will start with the scan list enabled Communications will not start if they have been set to be stopped at startup from the Configurator Use the software switches or Configurator to start and stop remote I O communications 63 DeviceNet System Startup Chapter 4 33 Confirm that the MS and NS indicators on all Master Units and Slaves are lit 34 Read the Network configuration from the Configurator 35 Save the Network configuration in a file from the Configurator 36 Switch the PC to RUN mode Note With the CS1W DRM21 or CJ1W DRM21 if the slave function is being used switch to the master fu
155. e not actually used by the Master Unit so they can be used by other Slaves The actual node address of the Master Unit however cannot be the same as the node address of another Slave When Slaves made by other companies are used that are for either output only or input only both the output area and the input area may be used depending on the status information Therefore be sure to check the specifications of the Slave before using any word allocated to a Slave DeviceNet System Startup Chapter 4 e Allocations for CVM1 DRM21 V1 and C200HW DRM21 V1 Master Units Node SYSMAC Programmable Controllers address CV series PCs C200HX HG HE PCs C200HS PCs Output area Input area Output area Input area Output area Input area CIO 1900 to CIO 2000 to IR 50 to IR 350 to IR 50 to IR 350 to CIO 1963 CIO 2063 IR 99 IR 399 IR 81 IR 381 0 CIO 1900 CIO 2000 IR 50 IR 350 IR 50 IR 350 1 CIO 1901 CIO 2001 IR 51 IR 351 IR 51 IR 351 2 CIO 1902 CIO 2002 IR 52 IR 352 IR 52 IR 352 30 CIO 1930 CIO 2030 IR 80 IR 380 IR 80 IR 380 31 CIO 1931 CIO 2031 IR 81 IR 381 IR 81 IR 381 32 CIO 1932 CIO 2032 IR 82 IR 382 48 CIO 1948 CIO 2048 IR 98 IR 398 49 CIO 1949 CIO 2049 IR 99 IR 399 50 CIO 1950 CIO 2050 62 CIO 1962 CIO 2062 63 CIO 1963 CIO 2063 Note 1 The words corresponding to the node address of the
156. e system and the total current consumption is less than 5 A e The power supply capacity for cables is restricted to 8 A for Thick Cables and 3 A for Thin Cables e A single Network is usually supplied by one power supply It is however possible to have more than one power supply when power supply specifications cannot be met with a single power supply See 2 3 4 Step 3 Splitting the System into Multiple Power Supplies e Fully consider the power supply capacity allowance in the design e f the power supply is switched OFF during the operation of the Network there may be a malfunction in the nodes e The current capacity of the drop line varies according to its length The longer the drop line the lower its maximum capacity becomes This is the same whether the cable is thick or thin Calculate the cur rent capacity passing through the drop line the total current consumption at the drop line using the following formula 4 57 L l Permissible current A L Length of the drop line m 22 DeviceNet Communications Line Design Chapter 2 Flowchart Use the flowchart below to determine the communications power supply on the trunk line Satisfy the conditions for each drop line on page 22 Provisionally determine the location of the power supply Step 1 Determine the best location of the power supply from the graphs Are the power supply specifications met
157. ee allocation 7 9 initial settings 75 special 79 84 errors 176 224 Index programming 191 standard 75 78 programming 180 switching operations 81 restrictions 82 Reset Input Bit 184 Reverse Input Bit 180 Reverse Stop Bit 180 191 rotational speed monitor data 77 rotational speed reference data 77 180 S scan lists 51 Sending Message Flag 184 188 Slave I O Size Differs 56 special 5 wire cables 11 special remote I O allocated words 84 communications timing 86 errors 176 function codes 84 inputs 79 outputs 79 overview 84 programming 191 responses 86 specifications communications 11 Configurator 10 DeviceNet 3 6 speed reference 77 standard remote I O inputs 78 outputs 78 programming 180 startup procedure 72 status alarms 154 CPF errors 153 faults 152 Inverter 152 operation 156 Operator 152 output terminal 156 system configuration 8 example 6 fixed allocation 8 free allocation 9 with Configurator 9 without Configurator 8 T T branch multi drop lines 7 Index T branch Tap 21 trunk lines 18 19 DCN1 1C 44 branching patterns 19 DCN1 3C 44 installation 43 T branch Tap Terminating Resistor 45 W Terminal Block 36 wiring 42 wiring communications cables 41 Terminal block Terminating Resistor 18 Inverter 42 Terminating Resistor 18 precautions 39 connection 45 preparations 41 connections 21 Termina
158. eep the DeviceNet wiring separated from the main circuit wiring as much as possible Do not wire them together 3G3RV 3G3PV Inverters of 18 5 kW or Less 3G3RV 3G3PV Inverters of 22 kW or More 3G3FV Inverters of 15 kW or Less 3G3FV Inverters of 18 5 kW or More Side panel of Inverter DeviceNet pi DeviceNet o t communications Communicationd perator line wiring Pass the DeviceNet Card communications line wiring by breaking off this portion a f Control wiring m Main circuit wiring Do not bundle the control wiring and main circuit wiring together DeviceNet Communications Card Crimp Terminal To further improve the reliability and ease of wiring use the following straight crimp terminal when wiring the communications cable to the terminal block of the DeviceNet Communications Card 1 0 dia a oo Model A1 0 5 8 WH by Phoenix Contact T Unit mm 2 6 dia DeviceNet Communications Card Terminal Block Wiring Procedure 1 Loosen the terminal screws using a thin flat blade screwdriver 42 Setup and Wiring Chapter 3 2 Insert the wires from underneath the terminal block 3 Tighten the terminal screws securely to a torque of 0 5 N m Note 1 Separate the DeviceNet communications cables from the main circuit wiring and other power lines Note 2 Do not solder the ends of the electric wires Doing so may cause contact failure Note
159. eference and begin operation first set the reference value to the frequency reference register 0001 and then write the run command to the Inverters run command register 0000 Note 1 Set values are retained until changed by the next writing operation Note 2 The following registers are in RAM so they are all cleared to zero when the Inverter s power supply is turned OFF Register No Hex Function Content Inverter run command Refer to table below Frequency reference Sets frequency reference Yes value See note 1 Not used Multi function analog 11 V 02D6 hex output 1 See note 2 Multi function analog 11 V 02D6 hex output 2 See note 2 Inverter output See note Refer to table below 3 Not used e Inverter Run Commands Register Number 0000 Hex Content Forward stop 1 Forward operation Reverse stop 1 Reverse operation Multi function input 1 Multi function input 2 Multi function input 3 Multi function input 4 Multi function input 5 Multi function input 6 Not used DeviceNet Communications Card Operations Chapter 5 e Inverter Outputs Register Number 0009 Hex Content Multi function contact output 1 ON Multi function output 1 1 ON Multi function output 2 1 ON Not used Note 1 The setting unit of the frequency reference can be changed in 01 03
160. en Inverter Ready is output 106 DeviceNet Communications Card Operations Object Details Instance Attribute Object Software Revision Content Indicates class 29 software revisions The revision value is advanced whenever there is a change Setting range Default Forward Stop 00 Stop 01 Forward operation Reverse Stop 00 Stop 01 Reverse operation Net Control Local remote switch Set note 1 00 Operate by b1 02 setting 01 Operate by DeviceNet with b1 02 set to 3 State Inverter status 03 hex Inverter ready During forward run 00 No Inverter output or operating in reverse 01 Forward operation or DC braking Turns ON even for DC braking during reverse operation During reverse run 00 No Inverter output or operating in forward 01 Operating in reverse reverse operation output status Becomes 00 with DC braking Inverter Ready 00 Preparing Initial processing not drive mode fault 01 Inverter ready Inverter can receive run command Fault 00 Normal 01 Fault Warning minor fault 00 Normal 01 Warning minor fault Fault Reset 00 Normal status 01 Fault reset Fault code Indicates the contents of fault that occur See the fault code list on the following page Control From Net Run signal input status See note 1 00 Operating by b1 02 setting 01 Operating by De
161. eration indicators that show the status of the power and communications as described in the following table Indicator Display Meaning Color Status PWR Green Lit Power is being supplied from the Inverter to the Card Not lit Power is not being supplied from the Inverter The Card is not connected properly and power is not being supplied to it MS Green Lit The Card is operating normally Flashing Initial settings or necessary preparations for communications are incom plete Red Lit A fatal error hardware error has occurred in the Card Flashing A non fatal error such as a switch setting error has occurred won Not lit Power is not being supplied from the Inverter The Card is not connected properly and power is not being to supplied to it NS Green Lit The DeviceNet Network is operating normally Communications connection established Flashing The Network is normal but the communications connection with the Master Unit is not established Red Lit A fatal communications error has occurred A DeviceNet communications error was detected caused by node address duplication or Bus OFF These errors make communications impossible Flashing A non fatal communications error has occurred due to communications timeout Not lit A DeviceNet Network error has occurred For example the Network does not exist power is not supplied to the Card or the baud rates do not match WD
162. eration times will differ according to the setting for C1 10 the unit for acceleration deceleration time If C1 10 is set to 0 the set ting range for acceleration deceleration times is 0 00 to 600 00 s Note 2 When the control mode is changed the Inverter will revert to default settings The open loop vector control default settings are given above Note 3 The default setting of the Inverter will differ depending on its capacity The value for the 200 V class 0 4 kW Inverter is given above Note 4 When the control mode is changed the Inverter will revert to the setting range The open loop vector control setting range is given above 162 DeviceNet Communications Card Operations Chapter 5 Reference Parameters Parameter Register Class 64 Hex Setting Setting unit Default Changes No Hex n range setting during Instance Attribute operation d1 01 0280 01 43 Frequency reference 1 0 00 to max 0 01 Hz Set 6 00 Yes d1 02 0281 01 44 Frequency reference 2 frequency A 0 00 Yes d1 03 0282 01 45 Frequency reference 3 0 00 Yes d1 04 0283 01 46 Frequency reference 4 0 00 Yes d1 05 0284 01 47 Frequency reference 5 0 00 Yes d1 06 0285 01 48 Frequency reference 6 0 00 Yes d1 07 0286 01 49 Frequency reference 7 0 00 Yes d1 08 0287 01 4A Frequency reference 8 0 00 Yes d1 09 0288 01 4B Jog frequency 6 00 Yes referenc
163. erature 45 to 60 1 C 45 No L8 15 04BB 04 BB OL2 characteristics Oor1 1 1 No selection at low speeds L8 18 04BE 04 BE Soft CLA selection Oor1 1 1 No Note 1 Values in parentheses are for 400 V class Inverters Note 2 If the setting is 0 the axis will accelerate to the specified speed over the specified acceleration time C1 01 to C1 08 Note 3 The initial value when C6 01 is set to 1 is given If C6 01 is set to O the initial value will be 150 Note 4 Values in parentheses are for Asian model Inverters 132 DeviceNet Communications Card Operations Chapter 5 Special Adjustment Parameters Class 64 Hex Parameter Register No Hex Instance Attribute Hunting prevention func tion selection Setting range Oor1 Setting unit Default setting Change during operation Hunting prevention gain 0 00 to 2 50 Speed feedback detec tion control AFR gain 0 00 to 10 00 Speed feedback detec tion control AFR time constant 0 to 2000 Speed feedback detec tion control AFR time constant 2 0 to 2000 High slip braking decel eration frequency width 1 to 20 High slip braking current limit 100 to 200 High slip braking stop dwell time 0 1 to 10 0 Operator Parameters High slip braking OL time 30 to 1200 Parameter Reg
164. es Types of Message Communications DeviceNet message communications are broadly divided into the two categories described below Of these two categories the Inverter s DeviceNet Communications Card supports explicit messages e Explicit Messages Explicit messages are defined by DeviceNet The class instance and attribute are specified for executing message communications The messages are the same for all Inverter products so mes sages can be exchanged in the same way with masters made by other manufacturers e FINS Messages Messages can be exchanged using FINS commands between DeviceNet nodes Masters and Slaves that support FINS messages FINS commands are actually sent and received using Device Net explicit messages 93 DeviceNet Communications Card Operations Chapter 5 Note Message communications are supported by CS CU series CV series and C200HX HG HE PCs but not by C200HS PCs Overview of Explicit Messages Explicit messages are sent and received as described below Basically explicit message communica tions are executed in 1 byte 8 bit units Node address Attribute Item Content Header The header indicates the beginning of an explicit message and that the frame is an explicit message request response It is set automatically for DeviceNet so there is no particular need to be concerned with it Node address Request Set the node address of the Slave Master to be requested Response The node address
165. eviceNet communications cable length are as follows e Maximum network length e Drop line length e Total drop line length Be sure to design and configure a Network that meets the conditions provided below to ensure reli able communications Maximum Communications Distance Baud rate Maximum network length Drop line length Total drop line length Thick Cable Thin Cable 100 m max 100 m max 39 m max 250 m max 100 m max 78 m max 500 m max 100 m max 156 m max Note Thick Cable 5 wire DCA2 5C10 100 m Thin Cable 5 wire DCA1 5C10 100 m Maximum Network Length The length of the Network is longest at either the distance between the two most distant nodes or at the distance between the Terminating Resistors There are two types of cables Thick Cables and Thin Cables The cable thickness affects signal deteri oration The maximum length of the Network therefore depends on the type of cable used as shown in the previous table The following restrictions apply to Networks in which both Thick and Thin Cables are combined Baud rate Maximum Network length 500 kbps Thick Cable length Thin Cable length 100 m 250 kbps Thick Cable length 2 5 x Thin Cable length 250 m 125 kbps Thick Cable length 5 0 x Thin Cable length 500 m Drop Line Length The length of the drop line is measured from the point in the trunk line where the original branch was made to the end of th
166. f data from the beginning S word Number of response data bytes 0001 to OOAO hex 0 to 160 bytes Set the size of the data storage area from the beginning D word Network address 0001 to 007F hex 1 to 127 When using CMND 194 with the CV Series a network address must be set for each DeviceNet Master Unit The network address is edited using the routing table edit function of a Peripheral Device except for the Programming Console Command destination node address 00 to Command destination Unit address 3F hex 0 to 63 Set Master Unit FE or Master Unit s unit Node address of the Master Unit number 10 to 1F hex 0 to 15 Response Communications port no 0 to 7 Number of retries 00 to OF hex 0 to 15 Set the number of times to resend for error response Response monitor time 0000 hex gt 2s 0001 to 028F hex gt 0 1 to 65 5 s unit 0 1 s Set at least 2 seconds for explicit messages Note Set 0 in word C 4 bit 15 to require a response or 1 to not require a response Responses are required for explicit messages so set 0 Message Timing When executing CMND 194 an AND condition must be set that requires both the PC s Network Com munications Enabled Flag and the Master Unit s Message Communications Enabled Flag to be ON Network Communications Enabled Flag 194 HHHH hH inb S D c Execution condition Message Communications nabled Flag m Message
167. formation was added Page 1 2 6 changed to 8 in last paragraph under Easy Communications Page 1 4 Last sentence removed from first paragraph Information on new functions added Page 1 7 Wording of first paragraph changed Page 1 8 Changes made to first paragraph under Configurator Review Page 1 9 Information added to table Page 2 3 Last paragraph removed Pages 2 12 5 7 5 27 Note added Page 2 17 Precaution added Page 3 5 Changes made to precautionary information First step of mounting procedure changed Page 4 2 Information on free allocation added Page 4 3 Information on scan lists changed in several places Page 4 5 Minor change made to last paragraph Page 4 6 Information on procedures for word allocation added Page 4 7 Changes made to information on verification error Minor changes made to allocation example Changes made to procedure in several places Page 4 9 First paragraph changed Minor change made to table Note changed Page 4 10 Information on allocation restrictions added Page 4 11 Note changed Changes made to procedure in several places Chapter 5 Order changed and information on control remote I O added in several places In addi tion the following changes were made Page 5 2 Changes made to precautionary information Page 5 3 Minor change made to captions Page 5 4 Last note removed Page 5 5 Note 3 removed and number of poles corrected in notes
168. g Allocated DM Area Words e Allocation in Order of Node Address When using allocated DM Area words words are allocated in order of node address It is possible not to allocated words to a node address but the order cannot be changed e Only OUT 1 and IN 1 Can Be Used When using allocated DM Area words only two blocks OUT 1 and IN 1 can be allocated Four blocks can be allocated using the Configurator e Slaves of 1 Byte or Less Can Not Be Allocated to the Leftmost Byte With the Configurator Slaves requiring one byte or less can be allocated the leftmost byte of a word but this is not possible when using allocated DM Area words 61 DeviceNet System Startup Chapter 4 Example of Free Allocations Using the Configurator Output area _ m Input area Node Output Input address points points Output block 1 Input block 1 16 0 CIO 1950 Allocated 00 CIO 1900 Allocated 02 8 8 CIO 1951 Allocated 01 Not used CIO 1901 Allocated 01 Allocated 03 16 16 CIO 1952 Allocated 02 0 8 CIO 1953 Allocated 10 10 32 o ClO 1954 Allocated 10 Node Output Input Input block 2 address points points Output block 2 4 0 48 CIO 2000 Not used Allocated 12 CIO 0010 Allocated 04 9 0 8 ClO 0011 Allocated 04 ClO 0012 Allocated 04 12 8 16 CIO 0013 Not used CIO 0014 Allocated 12 CIO 0015 Not used Allocated 09
169. g Written Data Flag Bit 000101 Sending Enter Command Flag Bit 000102 Setting 00 Function Code Flag Bit 000103 Data Write Completed Flag Bit 003010 Faulty Data Flag D00000 Register number of the parameter to be written D00001 Written data e Remote I O Allocation Areas I O classification 15 to 8 Output Register number leftmost byte Function code 10 Write 03 Read PC to Inverter Register data leftmost byte Register number rightmost byte Not used Register data rightmost byte Input Register number leftmost byte Function code 10 Write 03 Read Inverter to PC Register data leftmost byte Register number rightmost byte Not used Register data rightmost byte 200 Communications Programs SYSMAC Cs series PCs Chapter 7 Timing Chart 00000 Write Parameter Input Bit penis 03005 Data Agree Flag NN 00100 Sending Written Data Flag 00101 Sending Enter Command Flag i 00102 Sending 00 Function Flag 00103 Data Write Completed Flag Word n to n 2 Send Data lt Send Data Write lt Enter Command 00 Function Word m to m 2 Receive Data lt Send Data Write lt Enter Command 00 Function 1 2 3 4 Operation 1 Set the register number of the parameter and the data to be written in D00000 and D00001 respec tively When the Write Parameter Input Bit is turned ON
170. hanging to Thick Cable to meet specifications if the current capacity of the Thin Cable exceeds 3 A when using Thin Cable for the trunk line Setting the Power Supply Location Determine whether or not the current can be supplied normally by finding the current capacity required by each node and the voltage drop in the cables to be used to provide power Calculate the values below in advance e The current capacity required by each node e The distance between the power supply and each node The current capacity of the 3G3FV PDRT1 SINV1 DeviceNet Communications Card is approximately 20 mA Calculating the Power Supply Location There are two methods to find the best location of the communications power supply on the trunk line e Simple calculation from a graph e Calculation by formula Calculating the voltage drop from resistance and current consumption of the communications cables Each drop line must satisfy the equation on page 22 which represents the relationship between the drop line length and the current capacity for the drop line Note 1 From the graph a hypothetical power supply location can be determined if the conditions cal culated in the graph are met by estimating the worst configuration that has the maximum volt age drop as shown in the diagram below Node Node C Node Communications power supply Node Note 2 Even if the power supply specifications cannot be met using the g
171. hapter 5 Inverter Monitoring U1 Register Monitor Monitored item Output unit number number 0020 U1 01 Frequency reference Set in 01 03 Yes No 0021 U1 02 Output frequency Set in 01 03 Yes No 0022 U1 03 Output current 8192 dec Inverter rated Yes No current 0023 U1 04 Control method Set in A1 02 Yes No 0024 U1 05 Motor speed Set in 01 03 Yes No 0025 U1 06 Output voltage 0 1 V Yes No 0026 U1 07 Main circuit DC voltage 1V Yes No 0027 U1 08 Output power 0 1 kW Yes No 0028 U1 09 Torque reference 0 1 Yes No 0029 U1 10 Input terminal status Bits 0 to 7 terminals 1 to 8 Yes No 002A U1 11 Output terminal status Refer to table below Yes No 002B U1 12 Operating status Refer to table below Yes No 002C U1 13 Elapsed time 1 hour Yes No 002D U1 14 FLASH ID software No Yes No 002E U1 15 Terminal 13 level 0 1 100 10 V Yes No 002F U1 16 Terminal 14 level 0 1 100 20 mA Yes No 0030 U1 17 Terminal 16 level 0 1 100 10 V Yes No 0031 U1 18 Motor secondary current 0 1 100 Motor rated Yes No current 0032 U1 19 Motor excitation current 0 1 100 Motor rated Yes No current 0033 U1 20 Output frequency after a Set in 01 03 Yes No soft start 0034 U1 21 Input to speed control loop 0 01 100 Maximum Yes No frequency 0035 U1 22 Output from speed control 0 1 100 Motor rated Yes No loop current 0036 U1 23 Speed deviati
172. hapter 7 Ladder Program 000000 Read Parameter Input Bit 003001 DIFU 013 000001 003001 000001 003005 003000 000001 XFER 070 0002 D00205 CMP 020 D00205 Sets the function code to be read and register number 003000 Equals Flag P_EQ 003002 C 034 a D00208 CMP 020 D00206 D00208 P_EQ 003003 Equals Flag Confirms the completion of reading 003002 003003 003005 003005 MOV 021 D00201 a ORW 035 D00203 Transfers read data to D00001 D00204 D00001 Word m bit 7 000002 003001 003001 Detects data errors 199 Communications Programs SYSMAC CS series PCs Chapter 7 7 3 3 Writing Parameter Data This programming example is designed to write the parameter data in the 3G3RV 3G3PV 3G3FV Inverter After writing has been completed be sure to send an enter command to enable the written data as the Inverter operation data To use special remote O it will be necessary to switch the remote I O operation Refer to 5 2 Switching Remote I O Operation and change to the special remote I O operation Allocations Bit 000000 Write Parameter Input Bit Bit 000002 Faulty Data Reset Input Bit Bit 003000 Data Write Flag Bit 003005 Data Agree Flag Function Code and Register No Bit 000100 Sendin
173. he DeviceNet communications are to be always used set to 3 e Switching of Operation Commands from DeviceNet Communications e There is a switching signal Net Ctrl for operation commands from the standard remote I O of the DeviceNet Communications Card The input method for operation commands can be changed in the following ways using the Net Ctrl signal Net Ctrl 1 ON Automatically sets b1 02 to 3 making frequency references from DeviceNet communications valid remote I O frequency references become valid If Net Ctrl turns OFF b1 02 will return to the original value Net Ctrl O OFF The frequency reference specified by b1 02 becomes valid DeviceNet Communications Settings The parameters below are for functions that are exclusive to DeviceNet communications Set these parameters according to the desired application 66 DeviceNet System Startup Parameter No Name Operator display Communications fault operation Comm Bus Fit Sel Contents Select the Inverter operation performed when a communications fault is detected 0 Decelerates to a stop using C1 02 deceleration time fault detection 1 Coasts to a stop fault detection 2 Decelerates to a stop using the C1 09 emergency stop time fault detection 3 Continues operating alarm detection See note 1 Chapter 4 Default setting Setting range Communications external fault input detection metho
174. he initial setting for the Inverter s DeviceNet Communica tions Card is standard remote I O This remote I O can be used for general Inverter control CS1W DRM21 CJ1W DRM21 C200HW DRM21 V1 or CVM1 DRM21 V1 Master Unit SYSDRIVE Inverter 83G3RV 3G3PV 3G3FV az Tay Ne gt r Toae n Remote I O function N 5 Output PC to 3G3FV a 15 to 0 3G3FV PDRT1 SINV1 n Inverter run commands DeviceNet Communications n 1 Rotational speed reference vio Piranen edna deli T iring usi Input 3G3FV to PC Thin Cables Switch Bun Reverse OOOO Forward Stop Power supply Selection of either the communications control input or local control input is possible using Net Ctrl Net Ref Motor 75 DeviceNet Communications Card Operations Chapter 5 Words Allocated to SYSDRIVE 3G3RV 3G3PV 3G3FV Inverters A SYSDRIVE 3G3RV 3G3PV 3G3FV Inverter is allocated a total of four SYSMAC I O words two input and two output via a DeviceNet Communications Card I O classification Output SYSMAC PC to Inverter Word address Not used Inverter run commands Rotational speed reference leftmost bits Rotational speed reference rightmost bits Input Inverter to SYSMAC PC Not used Inverter status e Inverter Run Commands Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4
175. ies of parameter setting data will be enabled without storing them in EEPROM All the set data will be cleared to the initial data when the power is turned OFF Applicable to Inverters with software version of 1042 or later 85 DeviceNet Communications Card Operations Chapter 5 Note 1 Unless an enter command is transmitted data will not be enabled and the Inverter may not start Note 2 The enter command requires a parameter Register No 0100 or higher Since the run com mand or frequency reference Register No 0000 to OOOF is stored only in the RAM area set data will be enabled without an enter command Special Remote I O Responses When data is written and read using special remote I O the responses shown in the following table are returned Check that the input data and output data match when handling communications Error code Content Normal completion response The function code and register number at the time of transmission are placed at the beginning and returned with the data amount when data is written or the read data when data is read attached Function code error An unsupported function code was received Register number error An unregistered register number was received Data setting error An upper or lower limit was exceeded or a constant restriction was violated See note 2 Writing mode error Either writing was executed during operation or during a CPU err
176. ing Instance Attribute operation d1 01 0280 02 80 Frequency reference 1 0 to max 0 01 Hz 0 00 Yes d1 02 0281 02 81 Frequency reference 2 ene and y 0 00 Yes d1 03 0282 02 82 Frequency reference 3 See note 0 00 Yes d1 04 0283 02 83 Frequency reference 4 1 0 00 Yes d1 05 0284 02 84 Frequency reference 5 0 00 Yes d1 06 0285 02 85 Frequency reference 6 0 00 Yes d1 07 0286 02 86 Frequency reference 7 0 00 Yes d1 08 0287 02 87 Frequency reference 8 0 00 Yes d1 09 0288 02 88 Frequency reference 9 0 00 Yes d1 10 028B 02 8B Frequency reference 10 0 00 Yes d1 11 028C 02 8C Frequency reference 11 0 00 Yes d1 12 028D 02 8D Frequency reference 12 0 00 Yes d1 13 028E 02 8E Frequency reference 13 0 00 Yes d1 14 028F 02 8F Frequency reference 14 0 00 Yes d1 15 0290 02 90 Frequency reference 15 0 00 Yes d1 16 0291 02 91 Frequency reference 16 0 00 Yes d1 17 0292 02 92 Jog frequency reference 6 00 Yes d2 01 0289 02 89 Frequency reference up 0 0 to 0 1 100 0 No per limit 110 0 d2 02 028A 02 8A Frequency reference 0 0 to 0 1 0 0 No lower limit 110 0 d2 03 0293 02 93 Master speed reference 0 0 to 0 1 0 0 No lower limit 110 0 d3 01 0294 02 94 Jump frequency 1 0 0 to 0 1 Hz 0 0 No d3 02 0295 02 95 Jump frequency 2 400 0 0 1 Hz 0 0 No d3 03 0296 02 96 Jump frequency 3 0 1 Hz 0 0 No d3 04 0297 02 97 Jump frequency width 0 0 to 20 0 0 1 Hz 1 0 No d4 01 0298 02 98 Frequency reference Oor1 1 0 No hold function selection d4 02 0299 02 99 Speed limits 0
177. ing Resistors Terminating Resistors are connected at each end of the trunk line to reduce signal reflection and stabi lize communications There are two kinds of Terminating Resistors available One that is provided with a T branch Tap and a Terminal block Terminating Resistor Use a DeviceNet Cable when connecting a Terminal block Terminating Resistor Communications Power Supplies To use DeviceNet connect a communications power supply to the communications connector of each node with a 5 wire cable Basically a communications power supply internal circuit power supply and I O power supply must be provided separately 18 DeviceNet Communications Line Design Chapter 2 2 1 2 Connections m Trunk and Drop Lines The trunk line is a cable to which Terminating Resistors are connected at the ends Drop lines are cables that branch from the trunk lines A special 5 wire cable is used for both the trunk lines and the drop lines Branching Patterns Branching Patterns from Trunk Line 1 One drop line from 2 Three drop lines maximum 3 Node connected directly to trunk line from trunk line trunk line Multi drop Trunk line Trunk line Trunk line Trunk line Trunk line v line T branch Tap T branch Tap N d Drop line T branch Tap Branching Patterns from Drop Line 4 One drop line from 5 Three drop lines maximum 6 Node connected directly to drop lin
178. ing the front cover terminal covers bottom cover Operator and optional items Leave them mounted in place while power is being supplied Not doing so may result in electrical shock malfunction or damage to the product Wiring maintenance or inspection must be performed by authorized personnel Not doing so may result in electrical shock or fire Wiring maintenance or inspection must be performed after turning OFF the power supply confirming that the CHARGE indicator or status indicators is OFF and after waiting for the time specified on the Inverter front cover Not doing so may result in electrical shock Do not damage pull on apply stress to place heavy objects on or pinch the cables Doing so may result in electrical shock operation stoppage or burning Do not attempt to disassemble or repair the Unit Doing either of these may result in electrical shock injury or damage to the product Do not store install or operate the product in the following places Doing so may result in electrical shock fire or damage to the product e Locations subject to direct sunlight e Locations subject to temperatures or humidity outside the range specified in the specifications e Locations subject to condensation as the result of severe changes in temperature e Locations subject to corrosive or flammable gases e Locations subject to exposure to combustibles e Locations subject to dust especially iron dust or salts e Lo
179. ion function Cable B Manufacturer Allen Bradley Cable A T Connector A Connector B m Internal Circuitry of the Power Supply Tap Power Supply Tap Fuse A Fuse B aTe gt eae V V CAN H CAN H 5 wire cables 5 wire cables on side A Shield l a on side B CANL CANL V O V Schottky Fuses used diode Littel fuse 312008 Rated amperage 8 A das Var VA Rated voltage 250 V oripa Anm 6 35 x 31 75 mm Power supply device on side C 29 DeviceNet Communications Line Design Chapter 2 2 3 5 Dual Power Supplies Because diodes are contained in Power Supply Taps these taps can be used to construct a dual power supply system in the Network Dual power supply differs from parallel operation of power supplies so the following restrictions apply Restrictions Dual power supply is basically used to ensure backup power supply not parallel operation of power supplies Therefore each power supply to be used must meet the power allocation specifications i e must satisfy steps 1 and 2 30 DeviceNet Communications Line Design Chapter 2 2 4 Communications Line Noise Prevention 2 4 1 Communications Line Noise The communications line sends and receives high speed pulse signals and checks whether the data is correct by checking the sequence of the signals If the
180. ion F1 01 0380 03 80 PG constant Oto 60000 1 1024 No 600 See note F1 02 0381 03 81 Operation selection at PG Oto3 1 1 No open circuit PGO F1 03 0382 03 82 Operation selection at O0to3 1 1 No overspeed OS F1 04 0383 03 83 Operation selection at O0to3 1 3 No deviation F1 05 0384 03 84 PG rotation Oor1 1 0 No F1 06 0385 03 85 PG division rate PG pulse 1 to 132 1 1 No monitor F1 07 0386 03 86 Integral value during accel Oor1 1 0 No decel enable disable F1 08 0387 03 87 Overspeed detection level 0 to 120 1 115 No F1 09 0388 03 88 Overspeed detection delay 0 0 to 2 0 0 1s 1 0 No time F1 10 0389 03 89 Excessive speed deviation 0 to 50 1 10 No detection level F1 11 038A 03 8A Excessive speed deviation 0 0to10 0 0 1s 0 5 No detection delay time F1 12 038B 03 8B Number of PG gear teeth 1 O to 1000 1 0 No F1 13 038C 03 8C Number of PG gear teeth 2 0 to 1000 1 0 No F1 14 038D 03 8D PG open circuit detection 0 0 to 10 0 0 1s 2 0 No time F4 01 0391 03 91 Channel 1 monitor selec 1 to 40 1 2 No tion F4 02 0392 03 92 Channel 1 gain 0 00 to 0 01 1 00 Yes 2 50 F4 03 0393 03 93 Channel 2 monitor selec 1 to 40 1 3 No tion F4 04 0394 03 94 Channel 2 gain 0 00 to 0 01 0 50 Yes 2 50 F4 05 0395 03 95 Channel 1 output monitor 10 0 to 0 1 0 0 Yes bias 10 0 F4 06 0396 03 96 Channel 2 output monitor 10 0 to 0 1 0 0 Yes bias 10 0 F4 07 0397 03 97 Analog output signal level Oor1 1 0 No for channel 1 F4 08
181. ion 150 to 210 1V 190 380 No level 150 to See note 420 See 1 note 1 L2 06 048A 04 8A KEB deceleration time 0 0 to 0 1s 0 0 No 200 0 L2 07 048B 04 8B Momentary recovery time 0 0 to 25 5 0 1s 0 0 See No note 2 L2 08 048C 04 8C Frequency reduction gain 0 to 300 1 100 No at KEB start L3 01 048F 04 8F Stall prevention selection 0 to 2 1 1 No during accel L3 02 0490 04 90 Stall prevention level 0 to 200 1 120 See No during accel note 3 L3 03 0491 04 91 Stall prevention limit 0 to 100 1 50 No during accel L3 04 0492 04 92 Stall prevention selection 0 to 3 1 1 No during decel L3 05 0493 04 93 Stall prevention selection 0 to 2 1 1 No during running L3 06 0494 04 94 Stall prevention level 30 to 200 1 120 See No during running note 3 L4 01 0499 04 99 Speed agreement 0 0 to 0 1 Hz 0 0 No detection level 400 0 L4 02 049A 04 9A Speed agreement 0 0 to 20 0 0 1 Hz 2 0 No detection width L4 03 049B 04 9B Speed agreement 400 0 to 0 1 Hz 0 0 No detection level 400 0 L4 04 049C 04 9C Speed agreement 0 0to 20 0 0 1 Hz 2 0 No detection width L4 05 049D 04 9D Operation when Oor1 1 0 No frequency reference is lost L4 06 04C2 04 C2 Frequency reference for 0 0 to 0 1 80 0 No loss of frequency 100 0 reference 131 DeviceNet Communications Card Operations Chapter 5 Parameter Register Class 64 Hex Setting Def
182. ions Card and a Configurator must be connected 2 Set up the explicit message connection e Turn ON the power to the Configurator and all Units participating in communications and press the Configurator s online button This will put the system into online status e Click the Device List button at the upper left corner of the Configurator screen With this the explic it message connection will be set up 3 Connect the remote I O to be used for the parameter objects e Select Tool T and then Device Parameter Setting P from the Configurator tool bar to display the parameter setting tool e Set the node address and then set the remote I O instance IDs for the parameter objects de scribed above attributes 01 and 02 Hex of class 65 Hex instance 01 Hex 4 Change the Master Unit and Inverter connection to the set connection e Reset the power to the Master Unit and Inverter The remote I O connection will then start up with the specified remote I O operation 81 DeviceNet Communications Card Operations Chapter 5 e When creating scan lists set the scan list to disable mode once and then create scan lists or change the settings as follows for the Inverter I O allocation byte number from the Configurator e Basic Standard remote I O 4 bytes both for OUT and IN e Special remote I O 4 bytes both for OUT and IN e Control remote I O 8 bytes both for OUT and IN Switching via Connection Objects This method is define
183. ister Class 64 Hex Name Setting Setting Default Change No Hex s range unit setting during Instance Attribute operation 01 01 0500 05 00 Monitor selection 4 to 40 1 6 Yes 01 02 0501 05 01 Monitor selection after 1to4 1 1 Yes power up 01 03 0502 05 02 Frequency units of 0 to 39999 1 0 No reference setting and monitor 01 05 0504 05 04 LCD brightness Oto5 1 3 Yes 02 01 0505 05 05 LOCAL REMOTE key Oor1 1 1 No enable disable 02 02 0506 05 06 STOP key during control 0 or 1 1 1 No circuit terminal operation 02 03 0507 05 07 Parameter initial value Oto2 1 0 No 02 04 0508 05 08 kVA selection 0 to FF 1 Depends No on capacity 02 05 0509 05 09 Frequency reference Oor1 1 0 No setting method selection 02 06 050A 05 0A Operation selection when 0 or 1 1 0 No digital operator is disconnected 02 07 050B 05 0B Cumulative operation 0 to 65535 1 hr 0 No time setting 02 08 050C 05 oc Cumulative operation Oor1 1 1 0 See No time selection note 02 09 050D 05 oD Initialize mode No 02 10 050E 05 0E Fan operation time 0 to 65535 1hr 0 No setting 02 11 0510 05 10 Fault trace fault history Oor1 1 0 No initialization Note Values in parentheses are for Asian model Inverters 133 DeviceNet Communications Card Operations Chapter 5 Motor Autotuning Parameters Parameter Register No Hex Class 64 Hex Instance Attribute Motor 1 2 selection Setting range 1or2
184. ite 03 Inverter to PC Read Register data leftmost bits Register number rightmost bits Not used Register data rightmost bits Timing Chart 000000 Program Start Input Bit sy 000001 Program End Input Bit i es 003110 Communications Error Flag 000002 Program Execution Flag ee a CC 000100 Frequency Reference Write Flag 000101 Control Input Write Flag 000102 Output Frequency Read Flag 000103 Inverter Status Read Flag 000300 Control Input Write Completed Flag 000301 Frequency Reference Write Completed Flag 000302 Output Frequency Read Completed Flag 000303 Inverter Status Read Completed Flag 000004 Inverter Stop Command Flag 193 Communications Programs SYSMAC CS series PCs Chapter 7 Operation 1 194 When the Program Start Input Bit is turned ON the Program Execution Input Bit will be set to self holding and the Frequency Reference Write Flag will be turned ON When the Frequency Refer ence Write Flag is ON the frequency reference data in D01000 will be transferred to the Inverter When the Frequency Reference Write Completed Flag is turned ON the Frequency Reference Write Flag will be turned OFF and the Control Input Write Flag will be turned ON Bits are shifted to achieve this When the Control Input Write Flag is turned ON the Inverter control input specified in word 0010 will
185. ithout explicit messages 63 4 remote I O words 63 4 words remote I O 20 6 remote I O words 50 6 words remote I O 13 8 remote I O words 37 8 remote I O words 10 With explicit messages 63 4 remote I O words 25 6 remote I O words 16 8 remote I O words 12 Max No Inverters with more than one Master Unit Calculate from the number of words allocated in the data areas and the number of words allocated to the Inverters 4 or 6 words Note 1 The DM Area cannot be manipulated by bit so it cannot be allocated for remote I O for Inverters Note 2 If the CPU Bus Link is used with a CV series PC the CPU Bus Link Area will be used for the CPU Bus Link Therefore the CPU Bus Link Area cannot be allocated to Inverters if the CPU Bus Link is used 15 Chapter 2 e DeviceNet Communications Line Design 2 1 Network Configuration Overview 2 2 Network Configuration Restrictions 2 3 Communications Power Supply 2 4 Communications Line Noise Prevention 17 DeviceNet Communications Line Design Chapter 2 2 1 Network Configuration Overview The following diagram shows the configuration of a DeviceNet Network Terminating Resistors Terminating Resistors are connected at each Communications DeviceNet are connected at each end of the trunk line power supply cables are used end of the trunk line
186. l Block 42 Thick Cable 11 26 exant lenih 20 word allocations overview 48 Thin Cable 11 26 SYSDRIVE 3G3RV 3G3PV 3G3FV Inverters 76 maximum length 20 225
187. l related inputs controlling the Inverter and program a sequence to stop the program Explicit messages Read the fault output for Class 29 Instance 1 Attribute OA using message communications If there is a fault in the Inverter the fault output will be ON so turn OFF all related inputs controlling the Inverter and program a sequence to stop the program Special remote I O Read register 0010 and check whether bit 07 fault output is ON serious fault If bit 07 is ON turn OFF all related inputs controlling the Inverter and program a sequence to stop the program Confirming Inverter Fault Status The fault information for the Inverter can be checked by using the following methods Perform trouble shooting based on the information corresponding to the fault and refer to maintenance information in the Inverter User s Manual 83G3RV 1532 3G3PV 1537 3G3FV 1516 Function Inverter Error Status Operation indicators on When there is an Inverter fault the details will be displayed on the Digital Inverter Operator of the Inverter The fault log can be checked using the monitor function U3 Explicit messages Read the fault code for Class 29 Instance 1 Attribute OD using message communications The code corresponding to the Inverter fault is specified Special remote I O Read registers 0014 to 0018 Check the fault status from the bit signals that are output for an Inverter fault The fault log can be checked usi
188. l the functions of 3G3RV 3G3PV 3G3FV Inverters and accessing setting all parameters e Outputs SYSMAC PC to Inverter Instance ID 100 Dec 64 Hex sytenumber etz ere ons owa ens ot oti mho Rightmost Function code write read code Leftmost Register number leftmost byte register number assigned to various parameters etc Rightmost Register number rightmost byte register number assigned to various parameters etc Leftmost Register data leftmost byte data to write to specified register Rightmost Register data rightmost byte data to write to specified register e Inputs Inverter to SYSMAC PC Instance ID 150 Dec 96 Hex Byenumber eit sne sns ha sis sia BT BRO Rightmost Function code returns transmitted code Leftmost Register number leftmost byte returns transmitted register number Rightmost Register number rightmost byte returns transmitted register number Leftmost Register data leftmost byte return transfer data amount or read data Rightmost Register data rightmost byte return transfer data amount or read data Note 1 Special remote I O outputs and inputs are paired When using special remote I O be sure to set them together Note 2 Special remote I O objects do not conform to the AC DC drive profile but are specially set for this product Note 3 The 16 bit data register number and register data is set using tw
189. lection 1 L6 02 04A2 04 A2 Torque detection level 1 0 to 300 1 150 No L6 03 04A3 04 A3 Torque detection time 1 0 0t010 0 0 1s 0 1 No L8 02 04AE 04 AE Overheat pre alarm level 50 to 130 1 C Depends No on capacity L8 03 04AF 04 AF Operation selection after O to 3 1 3 No overheat pre alarm L8 09 04B5 04 B5 Ground protection Oor1 1 1 No selection L8 11 04B7 04 B7 Cooling fan control delay 0 to 300 1s 60 No time L8 12 04B8 04 B8 Ambient temperature 45 to 60 1 C 45 No L8 15 04BB 04 BB OL2 characteristics Oor1 1 i No selection at low speeds Note Values in parentheses are for 400 V class Inverters Special Adjustment Parameters Parameter Register Class 64 Hex Name Setting Setting Default Change No Hex range unit setting during Instance Attribute operation N1 01 0580 05 80 Hunting prevention func O or 1 1 1 No tion selection N1 02 0581 05 81 Hunting prevention gain 0 00 to 0 01 1 00 No 2 50 N3 01 0588 05 88 High slip braking 1 to 20 1 5 No deceleration frequency width N3 02 0589 05 89 High slip braking current 100 to 200 1 150 No limit N3 03 058A 05 8A High slip braking stop 0 1t010 0 0 1s 1 0 No dwell time N3 04 058B 05 8B High slip braking OL time 30to1200 1s 40 No 148 DeviceNet Communications Card Operations Chapter 5 Operator Parameters Parameter Register No Hex Class 64 Hex In
190. led Allocation possible as long as the same words are not allocated to more than one Slave Basic Application Procedure 1 Set the initial settings for the Master Unit CS1W DRM21 or CJ1W DRM21 Unit number UNIT No switch on front panel Node address node address switches on front panel Baud rate front panel DIP switch pins 1 and 2 Communications continue stop setting for communications error front panel DIP switch pin 3 Hold clear remote output setting for communications error front panel DIP switch pin 4 CVM1 DRM21 V1 Unit number UNIT No switch on front panel Node address back panel DIP switch pins 1 to 6 Baud rate front panel DIP switch pins 1 and 2 Communications continue stop setting for communications error front panel switch pin 3 57 DeviceNet System Startup Chapter 4 ON DO oO Ff 10 58 C200HW DRM21 V1 Unit number MACHINE No switch on front panel Node address back panel DIP switch pins 1 to 6 Baud rate front panel DIP switch pins 1 and 2 Communications continue stop setting for communications error front panel switch pin 3 Set the initial settings for the Slaves Node address DIP switch Baud rate DIP switch Etc Mount the Master Unit and wire the Network For CV series PCs Master Units can be mounted to the CPU Rack or Expansion CPU Rack Only one Master Unit can be mounted For CS series and C200HX HG HE PCs Master Units ca
191. lt Reset Input Bit is turned ON Note 3G3RV Inverters support special remote I O from version VSF105091 Asian models Version VSF105081 Note Write the program so that the Inverter operation commands 001000 and 001001 will be turned OFF when the Fault Bit 002014 of the Inverter status turns ON and also take appropriate coun termeasures according to maintenance information in the SYSDRIVE Inverter User s Manual 83G3RV 1532 3G3PV 1537 3G3FV 1516 Allocations e Inverter Control Input Word Allocation Word Function Forward Stop 1 forward Bit Reverse Stop 1 reverse Bit Multi function Input 3 Bit Multi function Input 4 Bit Multi function Input 5 Bit Reset input Multi function Input 6 Bit Multi function Input 7 Bit Not used External Fault Input 1 EFO Bit Fault Reset 1 reset Bit 191 Communications Programs sysMAC CS series PCs e Inverter Status Word Allocation Word Function 002000 Operation 1 Operating 002001 Zero speed 1 Zero speed 002002 Frequency matching 1 Matched 002003 User defined speed matching 1 Matched 002004 Frequency detection 1 1 Output frequency lt L4 01 002005 Frequency detection 2 1 Output frequency L4 01 002006 Inverter startup completed 1 Startup completed 002007 Low voltage detection 1 Detected 002008 Baseblock 1 Inverter output baseblock 002009 Frequency reference mode 1
192. me at acceleration start 2 50 C2 02 020C 02 oc S curve characteristic 0 00 to 0 01 s 0 20 No time at acceleration end 2 50 C2 03 020D 02 oD S curve characteristic 0 00 to 0 01 s 0 20 No time at deceleration start 2 50 C2 04 020E 02 0E S curve characteristic 0 00 to 0 01 s 0 00 No time at deceleration end 2 50 C3 01 020F 02 OF Slip compensation gain 0 0 to 2 5 0 1 0 0 See Yes note 1 C3 02 0210 02 10 Slip compensation Oto 10000 1ms 2000 See No primary delay time note 1 C3 03 0211 02 11 Slip compensation limit 0 to 250 1 200 No C3 04 0212 02 12 Slip compensation Oor1 1 0 No selection during regeneration C3 05 0213 02 13 Output voltage limit Oor1 1 operation selection 123 DeviceNet Communications Card Operations Chapter 5 Parameter Register Class 64 Hex Setting Default Change No Hex range setting during Instance Attribute operation C4 01 0215 02 15 Torque compensation 0 00 to 0 01 1 00 Yes gain 2 50 C4 02 0216 02 16 Torque compensation Oto 10000 1ms 200 See No primary delay time note 1 constant C4 03 0217 02 17 Starting torque value 0 0 to 200 0 0 1 0 0 No forward See note 4 C4 04 0218 02 18 Starting torque value 200 0 to 0 1 0 0 No reverse See note 4 0 0 C4 05 0219 02 19 Starting torque time 0 to 200 1 ms 10 No constant See note 4 C5 01 021B 02 1B ASR proportional P 0 00 to 0 01 0 20 Yes gain 1 300 00
193. minal S5 function 0 to 68 1 3 0 See No selection note 1 H1 04 0403 04 03 Terminal S6 function 0 to 68 1 4 3 See No selection note 1 H1 05 0404 04 04 Terminal S7 function 0 to 68 1 6 4 See No selection note 1 H2 01 040B 04 0B Terminal M1 M2 Select 0 to 38 1 0 No H2 02 040C 04 oC Terminal M3 M4 P1 0 to 38 1 1 No function select H2 03 040D 04 oD Terminal M5 M6 P2 0 to 38 1 2 No function select H3 01 0410 04 10 Signal select terminal A1 Oor 1 1 0 No voltage See note 4 H3 02 0411 04 11 Gain terminal A1 0 0 to 0 1 100 0 Yes 1000 0 H3 03 0412 04 12 Bias terminal A1 100 0 to 0 1 0 0 Yes 100 0 H3 08 0417 04 17 Multi function analog Oto2 1 2 No input terminal A2 signal level selection H3 09 0418 04 18 Multi function analog Oto 1F 1 0 No input terminal A2 function selection H3 10 0419 04 19 Gain terminal A2 0 0 to 0 1 100 0 Yes 1000 0 H3 11 041A 04 1A Bias terminal A2 100 0 to 0 1 0 0 Yes 100 0 H3 12 041B 04 1B Analog input filter time 0 00 to 0 01 s 0 00 No constant 2 00 H3 13 041C 04 1C Terminal A1 A2 switching 0 or 1 1 0 No H4 01 041D 04 1D Monitor selection 1 to 40 1 2 No terminal FM H4 02 041E 04 1E Gain terminal FM 0 0 to 0 1 100 0 Yes 1000 0 0 01 See 1 00 See 0 00 to note 3 note 3 2 5 See note 3 129 DeviceNet Communications Card Operations Chapter 5 Parameter Register Class 64
194. mmunications with Configurator Free Allocations Applicable PC CS Series Master Unit CS1W DRM21 CJ1W DRM21 Supported communications Remote I O and messages Maximum number of Slaves per Master Unit 63 Maximum number of controlled points per Master Unit Using Settings in Words Allocated in DM Area 16 000 points IN 500 words x 1 block OUT 500 words x 1 block Using Configurator 32 000 points IN 500 words x 2 blocks OUT 500 words x 2 blocks Allocation areas 12 CIO 0000 to CIO 6143 WR W000 to W511 HR HOOO to H511 DM D00000 to D32767 EM E00000 to E32767 Functions and System Configuration Chapter 1 Applicable PC OS Series Allocation method Words are allocated to each node in the above data areas in any order The following limitations apply e Using Settings in Words Allocated to Master Unit in DM Area The following limitations apply when allocating words using settings in the DM Area Words are allocated in 2 blocks OUT 1 IN 1 Each block consists of sequential words Words for each slave are allocated inside the allocated words in order of node number It is not necessary to allocate words to unused node numbers The leftmost byte of a word cannot be allocated to an 8 point Slave Using the Configurator Using the Configurator allows much wider allocation than using settings in the DM Area Words are allocated in 4 blocks OUT 1 OUT 2 IN 1 IN 2 Each block c
195. n means input SYSMAC PC to Inverter 215 Appendix Chapter 8 8 3 DeviceNet Communications Response Time This section describes communications response time when OMRON Master and Slave Units are be ing used Use this section for reference when planning I O timing The equations provided here are valid under the following conditions e The Master Unit is operating with the scan list enabled e All of the required Slaves are participating in communications e No errors are being indicated at the Master Unit e Messages are not being produced in the network from another company s configurator for example Communications Cycle Time e One Master in Network The following equations show the communications cycle time Try when there is only one Master in the network If the calculation result is less than 2 ms the communications cycle time Try will be con sidered as 2 ms Tru amp Communications time for 1 Slave High density Unit processing time Explicit message processing time COS Cyclic connection communications time 0 01 x N 1 0 Note N Number of Slaves Communications Time for 1 Slave This is the time required for 1 Slave to perform communications Communications time for 1 Slave in the above equation represents the sum of the communications times for each Slave in the network The equations used to calculate the communications time Tps for different types of Slave are given below
196. n be connected is not reduced Blocks can be positioned in any order in memory e g the following order is okay input block 1 out put block 2 input block 2 output block 1 CPU Unit SS Address m Output area 4 Sie Address To Slaves Output TT Address block 2 inoui Address Addresses can be as nputarea signed in any order Input Address block 1 Input Address From Slaves block 2 Address Address Words are freely allocated to the Slaves and I O blocks can be set as desired Each node must be allo cated at least one byte leftmost or rightmost If a Slave requires more than one input or one output word then it can be allocated more than one input or output word If a Slave requires less than one word it will use either the rightmost or leftmost bits in the word allocated to it e Free Allocation Restrictions The following restrictions apply when freely allocating remote I O e The remote I O allocated to one Slave cannot be separated i e all input words must be consecutive as must all output words Inputs and outputs however can be separated e With a Slave requiring more than one word a series of allocations cannot be started from the leftmost byte of the remote I O The leftmost byte however can be allocated to a Slave requiring only 8 bits e Multiple words cannot be allocated as the remote I O for a si
197. n be mounted to the CPU Rack or Expan sion I O Rack Only one Master Unit can be mounted For C200HS PCs Master Units can be mounted to the CPU Rack or Expansion I O Rack Only one Master Unit can mounted Connect a Programming Device to the PC and turn ON the power supply to the PC Generate the I O table Turn ON the power supply to the Slaves and turn ON the communications power supply Switch the PC to PROGRAM mode See note 1 Perform the following and go to step 11 if the scan list was disabled at startup Otherwise go to step 9 a Turn ON a Fixed Allocation Switch 1 to 3 See note 2 b Confirm that communications are possible with the registered slaves by monitoring the Regis tered Slave Data Area c From a Programming Device connected to the PC turn ON the Scan List Enable Bit in the soft ware switches bit 0 Remote I O communications will start with the scan list enabled The software switches can be used to start and stop remote I O communications Perform the following from the Programming Device connected to the PC and go to step 11 if the scan list was enabled at startup and you want to re register the scan list Otherwise go to step 10 a Turn ON the Scan List Clear Bit in the software switches bit 1 b Turn ON a Fixed Allocation Switch 1 to 3 See note 2 c Confirm that communications are possible with the registered slaves by monitoring the Regis tered Slave Data Area d
198. nal S1 1 ON 0 OFF Bit 1 Multi function input terminal S2 1 ON 0 OFF Bit 2 Multi function input terminal S3 1 ON 0 OFF Bit 3 Multi function input terminal S4 1 ON 0 OFF Bit 4 Multi function input terminal S5 1 ON 0 OFF Bit 5 Multi function input terminal S6 1 ON 0 OFF Bit 6 Multi function input terminal S7 1 ON 0 OFF Bits 7 to 15 Not used 002C Inverter status Operation 1 Operating Zero speed 1 Zero speed Frequency matching 1 Matched User defined speed matching 1 Matched Frequency detection 1 1 Output frequency lt L4 01 Frequency detection 2 1 Output frequency gt L4 01 Inverter startup completed 1 Startup completed Low voltage detection 1 Detected Baseblock 1 Inverter output baseblock Frequency reference mode 1 Not communications 0 Communications Run command mode 1 Not communications 0 Communications Overtorque detection 1 Detected Frequency reference lost 1 Lost Retrying error 1 Retrying Fault including RS 422A 485 communications time out 1 fault occurred Bit 15 Communications time out 1 Timed out 002D Multi function output status Multi function contact output terminals M1 M2 1 ON 0 OFF Bit 1 Multi function contact output terminals M3 M4 or P1 PC 1 ON 0 OFF Bit 2 Multi function contact output terminals M5 M6 or P2 PC 1 ON 0 OFF Bits 3 to 15 Not used 002E to 0030 Not used 0031 Main circuit DC Monitors U1 07 1 V units voltage 0032 to 0037 Not used 116
199. nction by turning ON the Master Enable Switch 64 DeviceNet System Startup Chapter 4 4 2 SYSDRIVE Inverter Settings 4 2 1 3G3RV and 3G3PV Inverters In order to perform DeviceNet communications it is necessary to make settings for the Inverter accord ing to the application Note The parameters set here are applied to the DeviceNet Communications Card when the power is turned ON Turn OFF the power after changing parameters and turn ON again to apply them Frequency Reference Selection e Select the method for inputting frequency references to the Inverter Select the method suitable for the application Parameter Set value Contents Default setting No Digital Operator Value set in d1 01 used Control circuit Set using analog input from control terminals circuit terminals RS 422 485 Set via RS 422 485 communications communications Optional Card Set using DeviceNet Communications Card Pulse input Set using pulse input from control circuit terminals Note Pulse input is not available with 3G3PV Inverters and so this setting is not possible e When frequency references from the DeviceNet communications are to be always used set to 3 If this setting is performed frequency reference 1 can only be set through DeviceNet communications However parameter values set from DeviceNet communications or the Digital Operator are used for 3G3RV Inverters frequency references 2 to
200. nction contact output terminal M1 M2 1 ON 0 OFF Bit 6 Multi function contact output terminal M3 M4 1 ON 0 OFF Bits 7 to 15 Not used 0021 Error details Bit O Overcurrent OC ground fault GF Bit 1 Main circuit overvoltage OV Bit 2 Inverter overload OL2 Bit 3 Inverter overheat OH1 Bit 4 Not used Bit 5 Fuse blown PUF Bit 6 PID feedback reference lost FbL Bit 7 External error EF EFO Bit 8 Hardware error CPF Bit 9 Motor overload OL1 or overtorque 1 OL3 detected Bit 10 Not used Bit 11 Main circuit undervoltage UV detected Bit 12 Main circuit undervoltage UV1 control power supply error UV2 inrush prevention circuit error UV3 Bit 13 Not used Bit 14 RS 422A 485 communications error CE Bit 15 Operator disconnected OPR 0022 Data link status Bit O Writing data Bits 1 and 2 Not used Bit 3 Upper and lower limit errors Bit 4 Data integrity error Bits 5 to 15 Not used 0023 Frequency Monitors U1 01 Unit set with 01 03 reference 0024 Output fre Monitors U1 02 Unit set with 01 03 quency 0025 Output volt Monitors U1 06 0 1 V units age reference 0026 Output current Monitors U1 03 Inverters of 7 5 kW or less 0 01 A units Inverters of 11 kW or more 0 1 A units 0027 Output power Monitors U1 08 0 1 kW units 0028 to 002A Not used 136 DeviceNet Communications Card Operations Register No Hex Chapter 5 Contents Sequence input status Bit 0 Multi functi
201. nd power lines Low voltage cable 7 Communications cable Suspended duct Ea Floor duct Communications line SYSMAC I O Line 4 fs 300 mm Control cable max SYSMAC Power Line Communications line z gah iy General control circuit line se Qu 300mm Shielding SYSMAC I O Line K Power line Power cable py Power line Ground 100 Q max e Do not install communications lines and SYSMAC power lines onto the control panel on which high voltage devices are mounted e Because noise currents flow through metallic equipment such as casings the communications cables should be placed as far away from metallic equipment as possible e Ground the shielding wire on the communications cable at one point e If the same ground is used for the communications cables and communications power supply there is a possibility that noise may be transmitted through the ground line to the communications line In order to avoid this be sure that the power line ground and the grounds for the communications cables and the communications power supply are located as far from each other as possible N Caution Connect the communications signal lines V CANH shield CANL and V so that they do not come into contact with each other If noise is generated check the wiring e Communications may be performed even if the V and CANH or V and CANL are in contact with each other
202. nd will filter the noise current that flows in the shielding wire e Communications Power Supply Suspend the communications power supply without grounding it This will also filter the noise that flows from the communications power supply ground to the communications cable or the noise current that flows in the shielding wire The switching power supply is usually connected to the case and the capaci tor as shown below The ground FG terminal must be suspended and the control panel for the power supply itself must be insulated Switching Power Supply Configuration Switching power supply F Power AC power supply AC input supply O circuit DC output Casing 32 DeviceNet Communications Line Design Chapter 2 Suspending the Communications Power Supply S82J power supply ra 4 DC power supply s82Y OON Mounting Tool lt 4 Insulating material such as baked board or acrylic board When using S82J power supply When using other power supplies 2 4 4 Noise Prevention Wiring To prevent inductive noise do not wire the communications line SYSMAC power lines and other power lines near to each other Keep the power lines for Inverters motors regulators and contactors the communications lines and the SYSMAC power lines separated from each other by at least 300 mm Also provide separate conduits or ducts for the communications lines a
203. ng acceleration L3 04 048B 01 A5 Stall prevention during Oto 2 1 1 No deceleration L3 05 048C 01 A6 Stall prevention during Oto 2 1 1 No run L3 06 048D 01 A7 Stall prevention level 30 to 200 1 160 No during run L4 01 0490 01 A8 Frequency detection 0 0 to 400 0 0 1 Hz 0 0 No level L4 02 0491 01 A9 Frequency detection 0 0 to 20 0 0 1 Hz 2 0 No width L4 03 0492 01 AA Frequency detection 400 0 to 400 0 0 1 Hz 0 0 No level L4 04 0493 01 AB Frequency detection 0 0 to 20 0 0 1 Hz 2 0 No width L4 05 0494 01 AC Operation when Oor1 1 0 No frequency reference is lost L5 01 0495 01 AD Number of auto restart 0 to 10 1 0 No attempts L5 02 0496 01 AE Auto restart operation Oor1 1 0 No selection L6 01 0498 01 AF Torque detection Oto 4 1 0 No selection 1 L6 02 0499 01 BO Torque detection level 1 0 to 300 1 150 No L6 03 049A 01 B1 Torque detection time 1 0 0 to 10 0 0 1s 0 1 No L6 04 049B 01 B2 Torque detection Oto4 1 0 No selection 2 L6 05 049C 01 B3 Torque detection level 2 0 to 300 1 150 No L6 06 049D 01 B4 Torque detection time 2 0 0 to 10 0 0 1s 0 1 No 168 DeviceNet Communications Card Operations Chapter 5 Parameter Register Class 64 Hex Setting range Setting Default Changes No Hex unit setting during Instance Attribute operation Forward torque limit 0 to 300 Reverse torque limit Forward regenerative torque limit Reverse regenerative torqu
204. ng the monitor function U3 in registers 0090 to 0093 Memory Data Backup The SYSDRIVE 3G3RV 3G3PV 3G3FV Inverter uses EEPROM for the data backup Data is written to EEPROM when the parameters change or the power is turned OFF e Data can be written to EEPROM up to 100 000 times e Parameters are always written to EEPROM when they are changed using DeviceNet communica tions so limit the times that parameters are written to EEPROM as much as possible With the special I O data will be written to EEPROM when an enter command is received e Frequency reference and control command register numbers 0000 to OOOF for the special I O and the Net Control Bit and Net Reference Bit are not written to RAM or EEPROM When the power is turned OFF any specified values are cleared 177 Chapter 7 e Communications Programs SYSMAC CS series PCs 7 1 Standard Remote I O Programming 7 2 Message Communications Programming 7 3 Special Remote I O Programs 179 Communications Programs SYSMAC CS series PCs Chapter 7 Note In this chapter the bits words and data memory used in the ladder pro grams are selected at random When creating actual programs modify the contents so that they do not overlap with other areas 7 1 Standard Remote I O Programming When the following standard remote I O programming is executed the rotational speed reference data specified in the DM Data Memory Area of the PC is written t
205. ng the Best Location of the Actual Nodes Go to Step 2 if the best location for the power supply according to the specifications cannot be deter mined from the graphs The second method calculates the best location for each actual node and does not estimate the worst possible configuration for the power supply 27 DeviceNet Communications Line Design Chapter 2 Basically in the DeviceNet Network the permissible maximum voltage drop within the system can be specified at 5 V for a power supply line V or V by calculating the specifications for the voltage of the communications power supply 24 VDC and the input voltage of the communications power supply of each device 11 to 25 VDC Of the permissible 5 V maximum voltage drop within the system the permissible voltage drop is 4 65 V in the trunk lines and 0 35 V in the drop lines The following formulae are applicable when power is supplied independently for communications and the internal circuit For details on voltage drop and formulae when the communications power supply and internal circuit power supply are shared refer to the DeviceNet Operation Manual Formulae Try to calculate the best location for each node using the formula below If the best location for each node can be determined using the formula the specifications for the power supply to each node can also be met Do not exceed the maximum current capacity of the cable Thick Cable 8 A and Thin Cable 3 A Ly x
206. nge Default Changes setting during Attribute operation E5 06 0324 Motor 2 leakage 0 0 to 40 0 0 1 18 2 See inductance note S Parameter Name Register No Hex Instance Note 1 Values in parentheses are for 400 V class Inverters Note 2 When the control mode is changed the Inverter will revert to default settings The open loop vector control default settings are given above Note 3 The default setting depends upon the type of Inverter The value for a 200 V class 0 4 kW Inverter is given above Note 4 The setting range is 10 to 200 of the Inverter s rated output current The values for a 200 V class 0 4 kW Inverter are given above Note 5 The setting range is 0 00 to motor s rated current 0 1 A The value for a 200 V class 0 4 kW Inverter is given above Option Parameters Parameter Register No Hex Class 64 Hex Instance Attribute Number of PG pulses Setting range 0 to 60 000 Setting unit Default setting Changes during op eration PG disconnection stopping method PGO 0to3 PG overspeed stopping method 0to3 PG speed deviation stopping method 0to3 PG rotation setting Oor1 PG output ratio 1 to 132 Selecting integral control during accel decel Oor1 Overspeed OS detection level 0 to 120 Overspeed OS detection time 0 0 to 2 0 PG speed deviation detection level DEV 0 to 50 P
207. ngle Slave e A Slave cannot be assigned to more than one Master Unit 4 1 2 Scan List A scan list is used to register the Slaves with which the Master Unit communicates in DeviceNet remote I O communications It is the basis on which the Master Unit communicates with Slaves The Master Unit does not contain a scan list by default The CS CJ series DeviceNet Unit however has a default setting that allows it to communicate with all Slaves even with the scan list disabled scan list disabled mode but this operating mode should not be used for normal operation Always create a scan list prior to operating the Unit e Scan List Contents The contents of the scan list are given in the following table When a Master Unit goes online it compares each of these items with the Slaves that are actually connected to the network The items that are compared however will depend on the allocation method that is used 51 DeviceNet System Startup Node address Description Node address for every Slave Fixed allocations Free allocations using allocated DM Area words Compared Chapter 4 Free allocations using Configurator Compared Allocated IN OUT sizes and allocation area Settings for the number of bytes allocated to the Master Unit and in which area Compared Compared Vendor Unique manufacturer ID Not compared Set using Configurator Device type Unit product type value Not compared Se
208. not possible status area bit 12 in CIO 2001 10 x unit number This Flag is ON when message communications are possible 101 DeviceNet Communications Card Operations Chapter 5 Communications Flags Flag Functions Equals Flag SR 25506 The Equals Flag turns OFF when an error occurs in writing a command from the CPU Unit to the Master Unit This Flag turns ON after a command has been written normally from the CPU Unit to the Master Unit Error Flag SR25503 The Error Flag is OFF when all operands and the control code are legal This Flag turns ON when an illegal operand or control code is set or when there is an error in instruction execution Message Communications The Communications Enabled Flag turns OFF during messages Enabled Flag in the Master Unit communications or when message communications are not possible status area bit 12 in IR 101 10 x unit No This Flag is ON when message communications are possible 5 5 4 CVM1 DRM21 V1 DeviceNet Master Unit Message Transmission Using CMND 194 With CVM1 DRM21 V1 DeviceNet Master Unit CMND 194 is used to send explicit messages To send an explicit message it is necessary to place FINS command 2801 in front and to send the com mand to the Master Unit The Master Unit that receives the command converts the command data to an explicit message and transfers it to the destination node When sending an explicit message it is not possible
209. not supported has been received Invalid register number A register number that is not registered has been received Data setting error The data is outside the specified range or does not comply with the constant restrictions Write mode error Attempted write during operation during UV or while there was a CPU Unit error or attempted write to a read only register Attempted write during constant processing busy status Note The MSB of the function code will be returned as 1 when there is a communications failure Enter Command When entering data in the parameter constant register No 0100 or higher be sure to send an enter command If the enter command is not transmitted after writing data the following situation will occur e Written data will not be enabled Written data will be enabled only after an enter command is sent e Inverter will not start The Inverter will determine the state as being under programming until it receives an enter command and will ignore the start or run command After sending an enter command input the start or run command again 176 Communications Errors Chapter 6 6 4 Inverter Faults Detecting Inverter Faults When a fault is detected in the Inverter itself the status will change as shown in the following table Function Inverter Fault Status Remote I O The fault output allocated in the remote I O will turn ON If the fault output is ON turn OFF al
210. o 200 1 120 See No current current note 1 detection b3 03 0193 01 93 Speed search 0 1t0 10 0 0 1s 2 0 deceleration time current detection b3 05 0195 01 95 Speed search wait time 0 0 to 0O 1s current detection or 20 0 speed calculation 121 DeviceNet Communications Card Operations Chapter 5 Parameter Register Class 64 Hex Setting Default Change No Hex range unit setting during Instance Attribute operation Timer function ON delay 0 0 to 0 1 s time 3000 0 See note 5 b4 02 01A4 01 A4 Timer function OFF delay 0 0 to 0 1s 0 0 No time 3000 0 See note 5 b5 01 01A5 01 A5 PID control mode Oto4 1 0 No selection b5 02 01A6 01 A6 Proportional gain P 0 00 to 0 01 1 00 Yes 25 00 b5 03 01A7 01 A7 Integral I time 0 0 to 0 1s 1 0 Yes 360 0 b5 04 01A8 01 A8 Integral I limit 0 0 to 0 1 100 0 Yes 100 0 b5 05 01A9 01 AQ Derivative D time 0 00 to 0 01 s 0 00 Yes 10 00 b5 06 01AA 01 AA PID limit 0 0 to 0 1 100 0 Yes 100 0 b5 07 01AB 01 AB PID offset adjustment 100 0 to 0 1 0 0 Yes 100 0 b5 08 01AC 01 AC PID primary delay time 0 00 to 0 01 s 0 00 Yes constant 10 00 b5 09 01AD 01 AD PID output Oor1 1 0 No characteristics selection b5 10 01AE 01 AE PID output gain 0 0 to 25 0 0 1 1 0 No b5 11 01AF 01 AF PID reverse output Oor1 0 No selec
211. o SYSMAC PC Instance ID 151 Dec 97 Hex Byte number Rightmost Fault Alarm mi Inverter At refer During re During re Zero During run nor fault ready ence set input verse run speed Leftmost P lock Multi func Multi func Multi func Local re Undervol Operation completion tion output tion output tion con mote tage fault 2 1 tact output Rightmost Output frequency monitor rightmost byte Leftmost Output frequency monitor leftmost byte Rightmost Torque reference monitor rightmost byte Leftmost Torque reference monitor leftmost byte Rightmost Output current monitor rightmost byte Leftmost Output current monitor leftmost byte Note 1 A shaded box indicates that the bit is not used Note 2 Control remote I O inputs and outputs are paired When using control remote I O be sure to set them together Note 3 Control remote I O objects do not conform to the AC DC drive profile but are specially set for this product Note 4 For details of control remote I O functions refer to 5 4 Control Remote I O Operation 80 DeviceNet Communications Card Operations Chapter 5 5 2 Switching Remote I O Operation To use remote I O operations other than the standard remote I O operation it is necessary to switch the remote I O operation There are two ways to switch e Set the remote I O instance IDs for parameter objects e Set the remote I O instanc
212. o the 3G3RV 3G3PV 3G3FV Inverter and forward or reverse operation is performed at the specified frequency when the Frequency Reference Input Bit is turned ON and the Forward Input Bit or Reverse Input Bit is turned ON Allocations Bit 000000 Frequency Reference Input Bit Bit 000001 Forward Input Bit Bit 000002 Reverse Input Bit Bit 000003 Fault Reset Input Bit Bit 001000 Local Network selection Bit Bit 003000 Fault Flag D00000 Rotational speed reference data e Remote I O Outputs from PC to 3G3MV Inverter Words n andn 1 n Rightmost 0 Net Net Fault Reverse Forward Reference Control Reset Stop Stop Leftmost 1 mae z n 1 Rightmost 2 Rotational speed reference data Leftmost 3 Rotational speed reference data e Remote I O Inputs from 3G3MV Inverter to PC Words m and m 1 Rightmost At Reference Control Inverter During During Frequency From Net From Net Ready Reverse Forward Run Run Leftmost Rightmost Rotational speed reference data Leftmost Rotational speed reference data 180 Communications Programs SYSMAC Cs series PCs Chapter 7 Timing Chart 000000 e ce B lt lt a Frequency Reference Input Bit 4 gt 000001 Forward Input Bit 000002 Reverse Input Bit Word m bit 2 During Forward Run Word m bit 3 During Re
213. o to Step 2 and determine the actual position of the nodes by the formula calculation method e Calculation Example The following example shows a Network that requires power to be supplied for 240 m on Thick Cable The power supply is located in the center of the Network Because the power supply is in the center the maximum current will flow both to the left and to the right enabling the supply of at least twice the maxi mum current as when the power supply is placed on the end of the Network The current consumption for individual nodes is as follows Terminating Resistor Trunk line Trunk line Terminating Resistor 5 wire cable 5 wire cable Communications Node Node Node power supply Node Node Node 120m a 120m a Trunk line Power supply cable Total power supply length on left Total power supply length on right 120 m Total current consumption on left 0 1 0 25 0 2 0 55 A Total current consumption on right 0 15 0 25 0 15 0 55 A Maximum current for the left side of the Thick Cable see previous table approx 2 5 A Maximum current for the right side of the Thick Cable see previous table approx 2 5 A using straight line approximation between 100 to 150 m 2 3 3 Step 2 Calculati
214. o words for each setting Note 4 Be careful of the order of the leftmost and rightmost bytes of the 16 bit data The order is re versed from that of basic and standard remote I O Note 5 For details on special remote I O operation refer to 5 3 Special Remote I O Note 6 3G3RV Inverters support special remote I O from version VSF105091 Asian models Ver sion VSF105081 Control Remote I O Control remote I O enables using the functions and arrays of the Inverter control terminal I O signals The Inverter s multi function I O functions can be used during communications e Outputs SYSMAC PC to Inverter Instance ID 101 Dec 65 Hex Byte number Rightmost Multi func Multi func Multi func Multi func Multi func Multi func Stop re Stop for tion input 6 tion input 5 tion input 4 tion input 3 tion input 2 tion input 1 verse ward Leftmost Multi func Multi func Multi func Fault reset External tion output tion output tion con fault input 2 1 tact output Rightmost Frequency reference rightmost byte Leftmost Frequency reference leftmost byte Rightmost Torque reference torque limit rightmost byte Leftmost Torque reference torque limit leftmost byte Rightmost Torque compensation bias rightmost byte Leftmost Torque compensation bias leftmost byte 79 DeviceNet Communications Card Operations Chapter 5 e Inputs Inverter t
215. ode should occupy one input word and one output word Output words will be allocated even to Units that are used only for input For Units that require two input words or two output words the node addresses to which the second word is normally allocated cannot be set If it is set the word allocations will overlap e Allocation Areas for CS1W DRM21 or CJ1W DRM21 Master Units CS CJ series PC CIO 3200 CIO 3200 Node 0 Output CIO 3201 Node 1 area To Slaves CIO 3263 CIO 3262 Node 62 CIO 3263 Node 63 i l CIO 3300 CIO 3300 Node 0 Input CIO 3301 Node 1 area From Slaves CIO 3363 CIO 3362 Node 62 SE ee CIO 3363 Node 63 CIO 3400 CIO 3400 Node 0 Output CIO 3401 Node 1 area To Slaves CIO 3463 CIO 3462 Node 62 CIO 3463 Node 63 Select one of these i 1 CIO 3500 CIO 3500 Node 0 Input CIO 3501 Node 1 area From Slaves ClO 3563 __ ClO 3562 _Node 62 TE ELT E tech CIO 3563 Node 63 CIO 3600 CIO 3600 Node 0 Output CIO 3601 Node 1 area To Slaves ClO 3663 CIO 3662 Node 62 CIO 3663 Node 63 ClO 3700 CIO 3700 Node 0 Input CIO 3701 Node 1 area From Slaves ClO 3763 _ CIO 3762 Node 62 CIO 3763 Node 63 48 DeviceNet System Startup Chapter 4 e Allocation Areas for CVM1 DRM21 V1 Mas
216. of the responding Slave Master is set Service code Request Set the code of the requested service read write etc Response The MSB most significant bit of the requested service code is changed to 1 and returned Class Function classification major Indicates the classification of a function classification defined by DeviceNet To specify a function Instance Instance classification minor specify these three codes classification Attribute Attribute Set values are assigned for each function Data Request Set the data to be written Response Read requested data or fault message are attached Footer This is the part that indicates the end of the explicit message and executes the CRC check It is set automatically for DeviceNet so there is no particular need to be concerned with it 5 5 2 Sending and Receiving Messages with a CS1W DRM21 or CJ1W DRM21 DeviceNet Unit Using CMND 194 With a CS1W DRM21 or CJ1W DRM21 DeviceNet Unit CMND 490 is used to send explicit mes sages To send an explicit message it is necessary to place FINS command 2801 in front and to send the command to the Master Unit The Master Unit that receives the command converts the command data to an explicit message and transfers it to the destination node When sending an explicit message it is not possible to directly specify the destination node with CMND 490 T CMND 490 94 DeviceNet Communications
217. ol 0to3 Method A1 03 0103 Initialize 0 to 3 330 A1 04 0104 Password 0 to 9 999 A1 05 0105 Setting the Password 0 to 9 999 A2 01 to 0106 to User parameter 0180 to 050C A2 32 0125 settings Set the register numbers for b1 01 to 02 08 Application Parameters Parameter Register Class 64 Hex Name Setting range Setting Default Changes No Hex unit setting during Instance Attribute operation b1 01 0180 01 03 Frequency reference 0to3 1 1 No selection b1 02 0181 01 04 Run source selection 0 to3 1 1 No b1 03 0182 01 05 Stopping method O0to3 1 0 No selection b1 04 0183 01 06 Disabling reverse Oor1 1 0 No operation b1 05 0184 01 07 Operation selection O0to3 1 0 No for minimum frequency E1 09 or less b1 06 0185 Setting control input Oor1 1 1 No responsiveness b1 07 0186 Operation selection Oor1 1 0 No after switching to remote mode b1 08 01A6 Run source selection 0 or 1 1 0 No when not in drive mode b2 01 0187 01 08 Excitation level DC 0 0 to 10 0 0 1 Hz 0 5 No injection starting frequency b2 02 0188 01 09 DC injection braking 0 to 100 1 50 No current 159 DeviceNet Communications Card Operations Chapter 5 Parameter Register Class 64 Hex Setting range Default Changes No Hex
218. ommand 4 Bit 4 Multi function input command 5 Bit 5 Multi function input command 6 Bit 6 Multi function input command 7 Bit 7 Not used Bit 8 External error 1 Error EFO Bit 9 Error reset 1 Reset command Bits 10 to 15 Not used 0002 Frequency reference Set units using parameter 01 03 0003 to 0005 Not used 0006 PID target value 0007 Analog output 1 setting 11 V 726 Dec to 11 V 726 Dec 0008 Not used 0009 Multi function contact output setting Bit O Contact output terminal M1 M2 1 ON 0 OFF Bit 1 Contact output terminal M3 M4 1 ON 0 OFF Bits 2 to 5 Not used Bit 6 Set error contact terminal MA MC output using bit 7 1 ON 0 OFF Bit 7 Error contact terminal MA MC 1 ON 0 OFF Bits 8 to 15 Not used 000A to OOOE Not used OOOF Reference selection settings Bit O Not used Bit 1 PID target value register 0006H 1 Enabled 0 Disabled Bits 2 to 15 Not used Note Set all unused bits to 0 135 DeviceNet Communications Card Operations Chapter 5 5 7 2 Inverter Monitoring Functions Read Register No Contents Hex 0020 Inverter status Bit O Operation 1 Operating 0 Stopped Bit 1 Reverse operation 1 Reverse operation 0 Forward operation or stopped Bit 2 Inverter startup complete 1 Completed 2 Not completed Bit 3 Error 1 Error Bit 4 Data setting error 1 Error Bit 5 Multi fu
219. ommunications Card e When frequency references from the DeviceNet communications are to be always used set to 3 If this setting is performed frequency reference 1 can only be set through DeviceNet communications However parameter values set from DeviceNet communications or the Digital Operator are used for frequency references 2 to 8 and the inching frequency reference d1 02 to d1 09 regardless of the setting of b1 01 68 DeviceNet System Startup Chapter 4 e Switching of Frequency References from DeviceNet Communications e There is a switching signal Net Ref for frequency references speed references from the standard remote I O of the DeviceNet Communications Card The input method for frequency references can be changed in the following ways using the Net Ref signal Net Ref 1 ON Automatically sets b1 01 to 3 making frequency references from DeviceNet communications valid remote I O frequency references become valid If Net Ref turns OFF b1 01 will return to the original value Net Ref 0 OFF The frequency reference specified by b1 01 becomes valid Inverter Operation Command Selection e Select the method for inputting Run and Stop Commands to the Inverter Select the method suitable for the application Parameter Set value Contents Default setting No Operator Operation commands from the Digital Operator External Control circuit terminals sequenc
220. on 0 01 100 Maximum Yes No frequency 0037 U1 24 PID feedback 0 01 100 Maximum Yes No frequency 0039 U1 26 Voltage reference for 0 1 V Yes No secondary current 003A U1 27 Voltage reference for 0 1 V Yes No excitation current 003B U1 28 CPU ID Yes No 155 DeviceNet Communications Card Operations Chapter 5 e Output Terminal Status Register Number 002A Hex Content 1 Terminal 9 and 10 short 1 Terminal 25 and 27 short 1 Terminal 26 and 27 short Not used 1 Terminal 18 and 20 short Not used Content During RUN Zero speed Forward reverse 1 Reverse operation During Fault Reset input Frequency agree 1 Operation ready Alarm Fault Not used 156 DeviceNet Communications Card Operations Chapter 5 Inverter Monitoring U2 Register Monitor U3 Monitored item Output unit number number 0080 U2 01 Current fault Refer to table below Yes No 0081 U2 02 Last fault Refer to table below Yes No 0082 U2 03 Fault frequency reference Set in 01 03 Yes No 0083 U2 04 Fault output reference Set in 01 03 Yes No 0084 U2 05 Fault output current 8192 dec Inverter rated Yes No current 0085 U2 06 Fault motor speed Set in 01 03 Yes No 0086 U2 07 Fault output voltage 0 1V Yes No reference 0087 U2 08 Fault m
221. on input terminal S1 1 Bit 1 Multi function input terminal S2 1 Bit 2 Multi function input terminal S3 1 Bit 3 Multi function input terminal S4 1 Bit 4 Multi function input terminal S5 1 Bit 5 Multi function input terminal S6 1 Bit 6 Multi function input terminal S7 1 Bits 7 to F Not used Inverter status Bit O Operation 1 Operating Bit 1 Zero speed 1 Zero speed Bit 2 Frequency matching 1 Matched Bit 3 User defined speed matching 1 Matched Bit 4 Frequency detection 1 1 Output frequency lt L4 01 Bit 5 Frequency detection 2 1 Output frequency gt L4 01 Bit 6 Inverter startup completed 1 Startup completed Bit 7 Low voltage detection 1 Detected Bit 8 Baseblock 1 Inverter output baseblock Bit 9 Frequency reference mode 1 Not communications 0 Communications Bit A Run command mode 1 Not communications 0 Communications Bit B Overtorque detection 1 Detected Bit C Frequency reference lost 1 Lost Bit D Retrying error 1 Retrying BitE fault including RS 422A 485 communications time out 1 fault occurred Bit F Communications time out 1 Timed out Multi function o utput status Bit O Multi function output terminal M1 M2 1 ON 0 OFF Bit 1 Multi function output terminal M3 M4 1 ON 0 OFF Bits 2 to F Not used
222. onnec tion have been established e Remote I O connection allocated after explicit message connection has been established Note 1 With CS1W DRM21 and CJ1W DRM21 Master Units the connection path is automatically set at communications startup Note 2 This setting is not possible with CVM1 DRM21 V1 and C200HW DRM21 V1 Master Units 82 DeviceNet Communications Card Operations Chapter 5 Data Setting Example The set data must be converted to signal segments as defined by DeviceNet and then transferred For example when remote I O inputs are converted to special remote I O inputs instance ID 96 Hex the set data is as follows 7 o 7 o 7 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 62 39 36 Hex 9 in ASCII code 6 in ASCII code Instance ID set as ASCII code Number of subsequent bytes 2 bytes Header showing signal segment 011 Note For details on using message communications refer to 5 5 Message Communications Device Net Explicit Messages and the operation manual for the Master Unit being used 83 DeviceNet Communications Card Operations Chapter 5 5 3 Special Remote I O Operation There are four kinds of DeviceNet remote I O operation Basic remote I O standard remote I O the default setting special remote I O and control remote I O This section explains special remote I O Special remote I O operation enables using all the functions of 3
223. onnected 7310 OS Overspeed DEV Speed deviation 7500 BUS Communications error 9000 EF3 External fault Terminal 3 EF4 External fault Terminal 4 EF5 External fault Terminal 5 EF6 External fault Terminal 6 EF7 External fault Terminal 7 EF8 External fault Terminal 8 FFO Communications external fault 108 DeviceNet Communications Card Operations Chapter 5 5 5 8 AC DC Drive Objects Class 2A Hex AC DC drive objects are assigned to command related functions for drive devices such as Inverters and Servomotors Command related data reading and writing monitor data reading set data scale changes and so on are all enabled These functions are shared with similar functions used for remote I O so even if they have been set for message operations they may get rewritten for remote I O Support Service Codes Service Code No Hey Sevis 0E Get attribute single 10 Set attribute single Object Details Instance Attribute Object Software Revision Content Indicates class 2A software revisions The revision value is advanced whenever there is a change Setting range Default At Reference 00 Stopped accelerating or decelerating 01 At reference 1 Net Reference See note 1 00 Operate at B1 01 setting 01 Set B1 01 to 3 and operate with DeviceNet Drive Mode 00 Open loop vector A1 02 2 01 V f control A1 02 0 02 V f control with PG A1 02
224. ons protocol DeviceNet Supported connections commu nications Master Slave Remote I O and explicit messages Peer to peer FINS messages Both conform to DeviceNet specifications Connection forms Combination of multi drop and T branch connections for trunk and drop lines Baud rate 500 Kbps 250 Kbps or 125 Kbps switchable Communications media Special 5 wire cables 2 signal lines 2 power lines and 1 shield line Thick Cable DCA2 5C10 100 m Thin Cable DCA1 5C10 100 m Communications 500 Kbps Network length 100 m max distances Drop line length 6 m max Total drop line length 39 m max 250 Kbps Network length 250 m max Drop line length 6 m max Total drop line length 78 m max 125 Kbps Network length 500 m max Drop line length 6 m max Total drop line length 156 m max Communications power supply 24 VDC 1 supplied externally Slave power supply 11 to 25 VDC Recommended power supply OMRON S82H Series or S82J Series Max number of nodes 64 nodes Max number of Masters Without Configurator 1 With Configurator 63 Max number of Slaves Without Configurator 63 With Configurator 63 Error control CRC check 1 4 4 Inverter The maximum number of Inverters that can be connected to one Network depends on the PC model that is used the remote I O functions of the Inverter and whether message communications are used or not Use the
225. onsists of sequential words Words for each slave can be allocated inside the allocated words in any order Limitations That Apply to Both Methods The following limitations apply when allocating words using either settings in the DM Area or using the Configurator The maximum that can be allocated in one block is 500 words For Slaves with more than 8 points the first byte cannot be specified as the leftmost byte 7 to 15 The same Slave cannot be used for more than one Master Unit Words are allocated to Slaves as follows e 8 point Slaves Allocated leftmost or rightmost byte of a word e 16 point Slaves Allocated 1 word e Slaves with more than 16 points Allocated multiple words for Slaves with an odd number of bytes the last byte will be the rightmost byte Maximum number of Inverters 63 using one Master Unit only Maximum number of Inverters with Calculate from the number of words allocated in the data areas and the more than one Master Unit number of words allocated to the Inverters 4 to 8 words The DM Area cannot be manipulated by bit so it cannot be allocated for remote I O for Inverters 13 Functions and System Configuration C200HW DRM21 V1 or CVM1 DRM21 V1 Master Units e Communications without Configurator Fixed Allocation Applicable PC Master Unit CV Series CVM1 DRM21 V1 CS Series C200HX HG HE C200HW DRM21 V1 Chapter 1 C200HS Supported communica tions
226. or during UV or writing was attempted to a read only register Busy Writing was attempted during constant processing Note 1 When a communications error occurs the function code MSB will be returned as 1 Note 2 A constant restriction is a restriction on OPE error detection 5 3 2 Special Remote I O Communications Timing With special remote I O communications it is possible to use all of the SYSDRIVE 3G3RV 3G3PV 3G3FV functions such as frequency setting control input setting error monitoring output frequency monitoring and so on These functions are utilized by setting the register numbers and connecting to the various 3G3RV 3G3PV 3G3FV functions To use these functions properly be sure to use the following method to handle the data and provide a program for switching the commu nications processing Matching Function Codes and Register Numbers e In the remote I O outputs SYSMAC PC to Inverter set the function code register number and set data for the function to be executed e Compare CMP the function codes and register numbers of the set remote I O outputs and the remote I O inputs Inverter to SYSMAC PC If they agree proceed to the next process Note If data is repeatedly written to the same register number it cannot be handled Be sure to keep performing processes with different function codes or register numbers If it is necessary to write repeatedly to the same register number then alterna
227. or may occur when the scan list is enabled if I O allocations are not correct e Setup Error I O Area Overlap A setup error I O Area Overlap will occur and it will not be possible to start DeviceNet communications if the same word is used by more than one Slave connected to a SYSMAC Master Unit This error will occur only when the scan list is disabled To eliminate the I O area overlap and clear this error change the node address setting on one of the Slaves and restart the Master Unit by turning ON the power again or restarting e Setup Error I O Area Range Violation A setup error I O Area Range Violation will occur and it will not be possible to start DeviceNet commu nications if node addresses are set at values that exceed the specified range or if Slaves that use multi ple words are using more words than are specified in the I O area This error will occur only when the scan list is disabled To eliminate the above problems and clear this error change the node address setting on the Slaves and restart the Master Unit by turning ON the power again or restarting Verification Error Slave I O Size Differs With the scan list enabled if there are differences between the information in the scan list and the information from Slaves actually participating in the network a verification error will occur and it will not 56 DeviceNet System Startup Chapter 4 be possible to start DeviceNet communications This error will occur
228. output 2 See note 3 0 OFF open 1 ON closed Note 1 The functions set with parameters H1 01 to H1 05 multi function inputs 1 to 5 for 3G3RV 3G3PV Inverters and H1 01 to H1 06 multi function inputs 1 to 6 for 3G3FV Invert ers can be controlled with these bits Note 2 This bit is not used with 3G3RV 3G3PV Inverters These Inverters have only 5 multi function inputs Note 3 The settings of these bits are enabled when parameters H2 01 to H2 03 multi function con tact output and multi function outputs 1 and 2 are set to F Same for 3G3RV 3G3PV and 3G3FV Inverters Output from the control terminal block of the Inverter can be controlled via communications 89 DeviceNet Communications Card Operations Chapter 5 e Word m Inverter Status Signal name Contents m 0 During run 0 1 During run 1 Zero speed O 1 Zero speed 2 During reverse run O 1 During reverse run 3 During reset input 0 1 During reset input 4 At reference 0 1 At reference 5 Inverter ready O 1 Inverter ready 6 Alarm minor fault 0 1 Alarm 7 Fault 0 1 Fault 8 Operation error O 1 Operation error 9 Undervoltage O 1 Undervoltage 10 Run command selection status 0 1 Communications 11 Multi function contact output See note 1 0 1 Function set in H2 01 12 Multi function output 1 See note 1 0 1 Function set
229. ow be used so that remote I O can be selected more freely New Communications Power Supply Interrupt Detection Function A function has been added that detects interruptions in the communications power supply and detects errors if the DeviceNet communications power supply falls below the specified voltage 3G3RV Special Remote I O Supported from Version VSF105091 VSF105081 Special remote I O can be used with the 3G3RV beginning with 3G3RV software version VSF105091 Asian models VSF105081 Special remote I O is not supported by earlier versions Note Other DeviceNet communications functions can be used regardless of the software version Functions and System Configuration Chapter 1 1 3 DeviceNet Features System Configuration Example Master by OMRON Master Unit other company OMRON Master Unit OMRON Configurator DeviceNet Network OMRON Slaves OMRON Configurator OMRON Slaves hra Slaves by other company _ DeviceNet Network ZAIN Slaves by other company Slaves by other company OMRON Slaves Multi vendor Network DeviceNet conforms to the DeviceNet open field network specification which means that devices Mas ters and Slaves produced by other manufacturers can also be connected to the Network Therefore a wide range of fiel
230. parameters application 3G3FV Inverters 159 3G3PV Inverters 141 3G3RV Inverters 121 external terminal functions 3G3FV Inverters 166 3G3PV Inverters 146 3G3RV Inverters 129 initialize mode 3G3FV Inverters 159 3G3PV Inverters 141 3G3RV Inverters 121 motor autotuning 3G3RV Inverters 134 motor constants 3G3FV Inverters 163 3G3PV Inverters 145 3G3RV Inverters 125 operators 3G3FV Inverters 170 3G3PV Inverters 149 3G3RV Inverters 133 options 3G3FV Inverters 165 223 3G3PV Inverters 146 3G3RV Inverters 128 protective functions 3G3FV Inverters 168 3G3PV Inverters 147 3G3RV Inverters 131 reference 3G3FV Inverters 163 3G3PV Inverters 144 3G3RV Inverters 125 special adjustments 3G3PV Inverters 148 3G3RV Inverters 133 tuning 3G3FV Inverters 161 3G3PV Inverters 143 3G3RV Inverters 123 PMCIA Card 10 power supply calculating location 25 dual 30 location 23 multiple 29 noise prevention 32 Power Supply Tap 22 configuration 29 internal circuitry 29 Program End Input 191 Program End Input Bit 192 Program Execution Flag 192 Program Start Input Bit 188 191 192 Programmable Controller C200HS 14 CV Series 14 programming bits 192 reading data 187 reading parameter data 197 writing data 187 writing parameter data 200 R Reference From Net Bit 180 register allocation 150 remote I O allocation areas 193 198 200 basic 77 communications 2 3 6 8 fr
231. pter 3 3 2 Installation and Wiring WARNING WARNING N WARNING N WARNING WARNING WARNING N Caution N Caution N Caution Do not touch the conductive parts such as internal PCBs or terminal blocks while power is being supplied Doing so may result in electrical shock Turn ON the input power supply only after mounting the front cover terminal covers bottom cover Operator and optional items Leave them mounted in place while power is being supplied Not doing so may result in electrical shock malfunction or damage to the product Wiring maintenance or inspection must be performed by authorized personnel Not doing so may result in electrical shock or fire Wiring maintenance or inspection must be performed after turning OFF the power supply confirming that the CHARGE indicator or status indicators is OFF and after waiting for the time specified on the Inverter front cover Not doing so may result in electrical shock Do not damage pull on apply stress to place heavy objects on or pinch the cables Doing so may result in electrical shock operation stoppage or burning Do not attempt to disassemble or repair the Unit Doing either of these may result in electrical shock injury or damage to the product Do not store install or operate the product in the following places Doing so may result in electrical shock fire or damage to the product e Locations subject to direct
232. que limit Torque control torque reference e Setting unit 0 1 100 motor rated torque e Setting range 300 0 to 300 0 See note 5 Example To set the torque reference to 10 10 0 1 100 Dec 64 Hex Set as 64 Hex Note Note Note Note Note Torque compensation Specifies the torque compensation bias when using torque control See note 3 bias Torque compensation bias is only available when performing torque control in flux vector control mode It is used separately from torque control to compensate for mechanical torque loss e Setting unit 0 1 100 motor rated torque e Setting range 300 0 to 300 0 See note 5 Example To set the torque compensation bias to 100 100 0 0 1 1000 Dec 3E8 Hex gt Set as 3E8 Hex 1 The data setting unit can be changed with 01 03 frequency reference setting display unit Data that exceeds the upper or lower setting range limits will be considered faulty and ignored by the Inverter and the previous data will be maintained This function is only available with 3G3FV Inverters which are equipped with flux vector con trol mode Do not use with 3G3RV 3G3PV Inverters When not using either the torque limit of the torque reference set F9 05 torque reference torque limit selection from communications to O disabled If this setting is not disabled and 0 is sent as data the torque limit torque reference will be set to 0 and
233. r rightmost byte Leftmost Output current monitor leftmost byte Note 1 A shaded box indicates that the bit is not used Note 2 Control remote I O inputs and outputs are paired When using control remote I O be sure to set them together Note 3 Control remote I O objects do not conform to the AC DC drive profile but are specially set for this product 88 DeviceNet Communications Card Operations Chapter 5 e Word n Inverter Operation Commands Signal name Contents n 0 Stop forward 0 Stop 1 Forward 1 Stop reverse 0 Stop 1 Reverse 2 Multi function input 1 See note 1 0 1 Function set for multi function input 1 3 Multi function input 2 See note 1 0 1 Function set for multi function input 2 4 Multi function input 3 See note 1 0 1 Function set for multi function input 3 5 Multi function input 4 See note 1 0 1 Function set for multi function input 4 6 Multi function input 5 See note 1 0 1 Function set for multi function input 5 7 Multi function input 6 See notes 1 and 2 O 1 Function set for multi function input 6 8 External fault input 0 1 External fault EFO 9 Fault reset O 1 Reset 10 Not used 11 Not used 12 Not used 13 Multi function contact output See note 3 0 OFF open 1 ON closed 14 Multi function output 1 See note 3 0 OFF open 1 ON closed 15 Multi function
234. r control Sensorless vector con trol or flux vector control is set Note 3 With 3G3RV 3G3PV Inverters do not set F6 05 current monitor display unit selection to 1 units 92 DeviceNet Communications Card Operations Chapter 5 5 5 Message Communications DeviceNet Explicit Messages There are two types of DeviceNet communications Remote I O and message communications This sections explains DeviceNet Communications Card message communications With message com munications specific instructions SEND RECV CMND and IOWR are used for reading and writing data between Master and Slave Units 5 5 1 Overview of Message Communications Explicit Message Operations Message Communications Operations Message communications enable data to be exchanged as required between nodes i e between Masters or between Masters and Slaves on a DeviceNet Network For example the accumulated data from a given PC can be read from another PC and constants from various Slaves can be changed from a PC To use message communications however both nodes involved in the data exchange must sup port message communications C200HW DRM 21 V1 or Message communications function CVM1 DRM21 V1 Master Unit CMND 490 Reading Inverter output current 3G3FV Inverter 3G3FV PDRT1 SINV1 DeviceNet Communications Card Note T branch wiring using Thin Cabl
235. r supplies 3 2 1 DeviceNet Communications Card Installation N Caution Before installing and wiring an Optional Card always turn OFF the power to the SYSDRIVE 3G3RV 3G3PV 3G3FV Inverter and wait for the CHARGE indicator to turn OFF Mounting Procedure 1 Turn OFF the Inverter wait for at least 5 minutes remove the front cover of the Inverter and check that the CHARGE indicator is not lit 2 Mount the Optional Card to the option C area 3 Insert the provided spacers into the spacer holes on the mounting base of the Inverter 4 After properly engaging the connectors of the Optional Card and control circuit board insert the spacers to the spacer holes of the Optional Card and press the Optional Card until the spacers click 5 Connect the shielded ground cable of the Optional Card to FG terminal 12 E on the control circuit board of the Inverter 40 Setup and Wiring Chapter 3 6 Press the top of the connector 2CN and check that the apexes of the triangular marks on both sides match so Option i j JEN Control Connector Ii Circuit x 4CN for i Board 7 option A areal ii i i ht Option C Make sure that the Connector Hi apexes of the black 2CN for rt H Be triangular marks match P option C area al i lt n Connector fs
236. r to be set Setting range Default Chapter 5 Power Actual Can be referenced in hexadecimal with the output power monitor U1 08 minimum unit as 1 W Setting the attribute 1A power scale enables a multiplication factor to be set Input Voltage Can be referenced in hexadecimal with the input voltage setting E1 01 minimum unit as 1 V Setting the attribute 1B voltage scale enables a multiplication factor to be set Output Voltage Can be referenced in hexadecimal with the output voltage monitor U1 06 minimum unit as 1 V Setting the attribute 1B voltage scale enables a multiplication factor to be set Accel Time Decel Time Can be set and read in hexadecimal with the acceleration time 1 C1 01 and deceleration time 1 C1 02 minimum unit as 1 ms Depending on the acceleration deceleration time unit C1 01 setting numbers below 100 ms or 10 ms are truncated Setting the attribute 1C time scale enables a multiplication factor to be set Low Speed Limit See note 1 and 3 High Speed Limit See note 1 and 3 Can be set and read in hexadecimal with the frequency reference lower limit d2 02 and the frequency reference upper limit d2 01 minimum unit as 1 ms The minimum unit can be set by the frequency reference setting and display units 01 03 01 03 2 to 39 1 r min 01 03 Other than above 0 1 Maximum frequency 100 Setting the attribute 16
237. raph the conditions can be met and a hypothetical power supply location determined by using the formula Note 3 When the communications power supply and the internal circuit supply are the same use the formula to calculate a hypothetical power supply location because it cannot be determined by using the graph 2 3 2 Step 1 Determining the Best Location for the Power Supply from a Graph A voltage drop occurs when a current flows through a communications cable The longer the commu nications cable and the larger the current the greater the voltage drop The communications power supply at each node must be 11 VDC or more To ensure the correct power supply the relationship is plotted as shown in the following graph to find the maximum current that satisfies the voltage of the communications power supply at different trunk line lengths even if there is a voltage drop due to cable resistance 25 DeviceNet Communications Line Design Chapter 2 Thick Cable _Distance m 0 25 50 100 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 Max current A 8 00 8 00 5 42 2 93 201 1 53 1 23 1 03 0 89 0 78 0 69 0 63 Max current A O N WO A A Q N Distance m Thin Cable Distance m 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 3 Max current A Distance m Determining the Best Location of the Power Supply from a Graph
238. rd remote I O operation e Basic remote I O Remote I O operation for the standard DeviceNet configuration e Standard remote I O Remote I O operation DeviceNet compatible that is the default setting for the DeviceNet Communications Card e Special remote I O Remote I O operations that enable using all the functions of 3G3RV 3G3PV 3G3FV Inverters and accessing setting for all parameters Special remote I O op eration is a special function of this product it is not compatible with DeviceNet 77 DeviceNet Communications Card Operations Chapter 5 e Control remote I O Remote I O operation according to the control terminal input output signals of 3G3RV 3G3PV 3G3FV Inverters Control remote I O operation is a special function of this product it is not compatible with DeviceNet The default setting is for standard remote I O operation so it will be necessary to switch to either of the other types of remote I O operation if desired Switching the remote I O operation involves the use of message communications Refer to 5 5 Message Communications and 5 2 Switching Remote I O Op eration Basic Remote I O Basic remote I O is used for the standard DeviceNet configuration e Outputs SYSMAC PC to Inverter Instance ID 20 Dec 14 Hex Byte number Rightmost Forward stop Leftmost Rightmost Rotational speed reference rightmost data Leftmost Rotational speed reference leftmost data
239. rque 200 0 to 0 0 1 0 0 No reverse operation C4 05 0246 Startup torque O to 200 1 ms 10 No compensation time C5 01 0215 01 35 ASR Proportional P 0 00 to 300 00 0 01 20 0 See Yes gain 1 note 2 C5 02 0216 01 36 ASR Integral I time 1 0 000 to 0 001 s 0 500 See Yes 10 000 note 2 C5 03 0217 01 37 ASR Proportional Gain 0 00 to 300 00 0 01 20 0 See Yes P 2 note 2 C5 04 0218 01 38 ASR Integral I time 2 0 000 to 0 001 s 0 500 See Yes 10 000 note 2 161 DeviceNet Communications Card Operations Parameter Register No Hex Class 64 Hex Instance Attribute ASR Limit Setting range 0 0 to 20 0 Setting unit Chapter 5 Default setting Changes during op eration ASR Primary delay time 0 000 to 0 500 ASR Switching frequency 0 0 to 400 0 0 0 ASR Integral I Limit 0 to 400 400 Carrier frequency upper limit 2 0 to 15 0 See note 4 15 0 See note 3 Carrier frequency lower limit 0 4 to 15 0 15 0 See note 3 Carrier frequency proportional gain 0 to 99 0 Hunting prevention selection Oor1 Hunting prevention gain 0 00 to 2 50 AFR Gain 0 00 to 10 00 AFR primary delay time 0 to 2 000 Note 1 Carrier Frequency Selection During Auto tuning 1or2 The setting range and setting unit for acceleration decel
240. rter Instance ID 101 Dec 65 Hex Byte number Rightmost Multi func Multi func Multi func Multi func Multi func Multi func Stop re Stop for tion input 6 tion input 5 tion input 4 tion input 3 tion input 2 tion input 1 verse ward Leftmost Multi func Multi func Multi func Fault reset External tion output tion output tion con fault input 2 1 tact output Rightmost Frequency reference rightmost byte Leftmost Frequency reference leftmost byte Rightmost Torque reference torque limit rightmost byte Leftmost Torque reference torque limit leftmost byte Rightmost Torque compensation bias rightmost byte Leftmost Torque compensation bias leftmost byte e Inputs Inverter to SYSMAC PC Instance ID 151 Dec 97 Hex Byte number Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Rightmost Fault Alarm mi Inverter At refer During re During re Zero During run nor fault ready ence set input verse run speed Leftmost P lock Multi func Multi func Multi func Local re Undervol Operation completion tion output tion output tion con mote tage fault 2 1 tact output Rightmost Output frequency monitor rightmost byte Leftmost Output frequency monitor leftmost byte Rightmost Torque reference monitor rightmost byte Leftmost Torque reference monitor leftmost byte Rightmost Output current monito
241. s Output phase loss Not used OPR disconnected EEPROM error Not used 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 e Fault 3 Register Number 0016 Hex at aay Not used 1 BUS Communications error e CPF Error 1 Register Number 0017 Display Content 0 Not used 1 oz 2 CPF02 Baseblock circuit error 3 CPF03 EEPROM error 4 CPF04 Internal A D error See note 1 5 CPF05 External A D error See note 2 6 CPF06 Option connect error 7 to 15 Not used Note 1 CPU internal A D converter error Note 2 CPU external A D converter error e CPF Error 2 Register Number 0018 Hex m Dey CPF20 Optional Card A D error 1to15 Not used 153 DeviceNet Communications Card Operations Chapter 5 e Alarm 1 Register Number 0019 Hex Display Content 0 UV Undervoltage main 1 OV Overvoltage 2 OH Overheat 3 OH2 External overheat 2 4 OL3 Overtorque detection 1 5 OL4 Overtorque detection 2 6 EF Forward reverse simultaneous input 7 BB Baseblock 8 EF3 External fault 3 9 EF4 External fault 4 10 EF5 External fault 5 11 EF6 External fault 6 12 EF7 External fault 7 13 EF8 External fault 8 14 Not used 15 OS Overspeed e Alarm 2 Register Number 001A Hex Content Speed deviation PG is disconnected Not used 154 DeviceNet Communications Card Operations C
242. s U2 01 119 DeviceNet Communications Card Operations Register No Hex 0094 080A Cumulative operation time since last fault Contents Monitors U3 05 1 hr units 0095 080B Cumulative operation time since 2nd prior fault Monitors U3 06 1 hr units 0096 080C Cumulative operation time since 3rd prior fault Monitors U3 07 1 hr units 0097 080D Cumulative operation time since 4th prior fault Monitors U3 08 1 hr units 0804 Content of 5th prior fault Monitors U3 09 same codes as U2 01 See note 0805 Content of 6th prior fault Monitors U3 10 same codes as U2 01 See note 0806 Content of 7th prior fault Monitors U3 11 same codes as U2 01 See note 0807 Content of 8th prior fault Monitors U3 12 same codes as U2 01 See note 0808 Content of 9th prior fault Monitors U3 13 same codes as U2 01 See note 0809 Content of 10th prior fault See note Monitors U3 14 same codes as U2 01 080E Cumulative operation time since 5th prior fault Monitors U3 15 1 hr units See note 080F Cumulative operation time since 6th prior fault Monitors U3 16 1 hr units See note 0810 Cumulative operation time since 7th prior fault Monitors U3 17 1 hr units See note 0811 Cumulative operation time since 8th prior fault Monitors U3 18 1 hr units See no
243. saturation coefficient 2 E2 09 0316 01 6F Mechanical loss 0 0 to 10 0 0 1 0 0 No E2 10 0325 Torque compensation 0 to 65 535 1W 14 See No motor iron loss note 3 E3 01 0317 Select control method O0to3 1 2 No of motor 2 E4 01 0318 Motor 2 maximum 40 0 to 400 0 0 1 Hz 60 0 No frequency E4 02 0319 Motor 2 maximum 0 0 to 255 0 0 0 0 1 V 200 0 No voltage to 510 0 400 0 E4 03 031A Motor 2 maximum 0 0 to 400 0 0 1 Hz 60 0 No voltage frequency E4 04 031B Motor 2 intermediate 0 0 to 400 0 0 1 Hz 3 0 See No frequency note 2 E4 05 031C Motor 2 intermediate 0 0 to 255 0 0 0 0 1 V 11 0 22 0 No voltage to 510 0 See note 2 E4 06 031D Motor 2 minimum 0 0 to 400 0 0 1 Hz 0 5 See No frequency note 2 E4 07 031E Motor 2 minimum 0 0 to 255 0 0 0 0 1 V 2 0 4 0 No voltage to 510 0 See note 2 E5 01 031F Motor 2 rated current 0 32 to 6 40 See 0 01 A 1 90 See No note 4 note 3 E5 02 0320 Motor 2 rated slip 0 00 to 20 00 0 01 Hz 2 90 See No note 3 E5 03 0321 Motor 2 no load current 0 00 to 2 90 See 0 01 A 1 20 See No note 5 note 3 E5 04 0322 Motor 2 number of 2 to 48 1 pole 4 No motor poles E5 05 0323 Motor 2 phase to phase 0 000 to 65 000 0 001 Q 9 842 No resistance See note 3 164 DeviceNet Communications Card Operations Chapter 5 Class 64 Hex Setting ra
244. setting during Instance Attribute operation b2 03 0189 01 0A DC injection braking 0 00 to 10 00 0 01 s 0 00 No time at start b2 04 018A 01 0B DC injection braking 0 00 to 10 00 0 01 s 0 50 No time at stop b2 08 01AB Magnetic flux 0 to 500 1 0 No compensation amount b3 01 018E 01 0c Speed search Oori 1 0 See No selection at start note b3 02 018F 01 oD Speed search 0 to 200 1 100 No operation current b3 03 0190 01 0E Speed search 0 1 to 10 0 0 1 s 2 0 No deceleration time b4 01 0192 Timer function 0 0 to 300 0 0 1 s 0 0 No ON delay time b4 02 0193 Timer function 0 0 to 300 0 0 1 s 0 0 No OFF delay time b5 01 0194 01 OF PID control selection 0 to 4 1 0 No b5 02 0195 01 10 Proportional gain P 0 00 to 25 00 0 01 1 00 Yes b5 03 0196 01 11 Integral time I 0 0 to 360 0 0 1s 1 0 Yes b5 04 0197 01 12 Integral limit I 0 0 to 100 0 0 1 100 0 Yes b5 05 0198 01 13 Differential time D 0 00 to 10 00 0 01 s 0 00 Yes b5 06 0199 01 14 PID limit 0 0 to 100 0 0 1 100 0 Yes b5 07 019A 01 15 PID offset adjustment 100 0 to 100 0 0 1 0 0 Yes b5 08 019B 01 16 PID primary delay 0 00 to 10 00 0 01 s 0 00 Yes time constant b5 09 01A7 PID output Oor1 1 0 No characteristic selection b5 10 01A8 PID output gain 0 0 to 25 0 0 1 1 0 No b5 11 01A9 PID output reverse Oor1 1 0 No selection b5 12 O1AF Feedback loss Oto2 1 0 No detection selection b5 13 01BO Feedback loss
245. sible Turn ON the power supply again after the following steps e Correct node address du plication e Connect termination resis tance to both ends of the com munications line e Correct the Master Unit errors that occur when the Master Unit stops after communica tions is once established e Correct environmental condi tions such as noise Flashing A non fatal communications error has oc curred due to communications timeout Turn ON the power supply again after the following pro cessing e Connect termination resis tance to both ends of the com munications line e Correct defective connec tions in the communications line e Correct environmental condi tions such as noise Not lit A DeviceNet Network error has occurred For example the Network does not exist power is not supplied to the Card or the baud rates do not match Check the baud rate setting Check the Option Card con nector and turn ON the Invert er power supply Replace the Option Card 173 Communications Errors Chapter 6 Indicator Display Meaning Countermeasures Color Status Flashing The CPU Unit of the Card is operating nor mally Lit The CPU Unit of the Card is not ready or Check the Option Card con the CPU Unit has malfunctioned nector and turn ON the Invert er power supply Replace the Option Card Not lit Power is not being supplied from the In Check the Option Card con
246. sign Not used Fault input terminal status Monitors U2 11 same contents as U1 10 Fault output terminal status Monitors U2 12 same contents as U1 11 Fault operating status Monitors U2 13 same contents as U1 12 Fault cumulative operation time Monitors U2 14 1 hr units Content of last fault Monitors U3 01 same codes as U2 01 Content of 2nd prior fault Monitors U3 02 same codes as U2 01 Content of 3rd prior fault Monitors U3 03 same codes as U2 01 Content of 4th prior fault Monitors U3 04 same codes as U2 01 Cumulative operation time since last fault Monitors U3 05 1 hr units 0095 080B Cumulative operation time since 2nd prior fault Monitors U3 06 1 hr units 0096 080C Cumulative operation time since 3rd prior fault Monitors U3 07 1 hr units 0097 080D Cumulative operation time since 4th prior fault Monitors U3 08 1 hr units 0804 Content of 5th prior fault Monitors U3 09 same codes as U2 01 See note 0805 Content of 6th prior fault Monitors U3 10 same codes as U2 01 See note 0806 Content of 7th prior fault Monitors U3 11 same codes as U2 01 0807 Content of 8th prior fault Monitors U3 12 same codes as U2 01 See note 0808 Content of 9th prior fault Monitors U3 13 same codes as U2 01 See note 0809 Content of 10th prior faul
247. speed scale enables a multiplication factor to be set for 01 03 2 to 39 1 r min 0 to 109 of maximum frequency 0 to 110 of maximum frequency Speed scale Speed data unit selection can be set and read The speed data unit value is calculated as follows Unit 1 r min x 1 22 a Speed scale set value Set a negative value as its 2 s complement 15to 15 F1 to OF hex Current scale 110 Current data unit selection can be set and read The current data unit value is calculated as follows Unit 0 1 A x 1 26 b Current scale set value Set a negative value as its 2 s complement 15 to 15 F1 to OF hex DeviceNet Communications Card Operations Chapter 5 Instance Attribute Content Setting Default range Power scale Power data unit selection can be set and read The power data unit value is calculated as follows Unit 0 1 W x 1 2 c Power scale set value Set a negative value as its 2 s complement Voltage scale Voltage data unit selection canbe setand 15to 15 read The voltage data unit value is F1 to OF calculated as follows hex Unit 0 1 V x 1 29 d Voltage scale set value Set a negative value as its 2 s complement Time scale Time data unit selection can be set and 15 to 15 read The time data unit value is calculated F1 to OF as follows hex Unit 0 1 V x 1 2 e Voltage scale set value Set a nega
248. stance Attribute Setting range Setting unit Default setting Change during operation reference setting and monitor Monitor selection 4 to 40 1 6 Yes 01 02 0501 05 01 Monitor selection after 1to4 1 1 Yes power up 01 03 0502 05 02 Frequency units of 0 to 39 999 1 0 No 01 05 0504 05 04 LCD brightness Oto5 1 3 Yes 02 01 0505 05 05 LOCAL REMOTE key Oor1 1 1 No enable disable 02 02 0506 05 06 STOP key during control 0 or 1 1 1 No circuit terminal operation 02 03 0507 05 07 Parameter initial value Oto2 1 0 No 02 04 0508 05 08 kVA selection 0 to FF 1 Depends No on capacity 02 05 0509 05 09 Frequency reference Oor1 1 0 No setting method selection 02 06 050A 05 OA Operation selection when 0 or 1 1 0 No digital operator is disconnected time selection 02 07 050B 05 0B Cumulative operation 0 to 65 535 1hr 0 No time setting 02 08 050C 05 oC Cumulative operation Oor1 1 1 No Initialize mode Fan operation time setting 0 to 65 535 Fault history initialization Oor1 149 DeviceNet Communications Card Operations Chapter 5 5 8 3G3FV Register Numbers Classes Instances and Attributes 5 8 1 Inputting Control Frequency The Inverter s various control inputs are allocated to the registers shown in the following table For ex ample to set the frequency r
249. sunlight e Locations subject to temperatures or humidity outside the range specified in the specifications e Locations subject to condensation as the result of severe changes in temperature e Locations subject to corrosive or flammable gases e Locations subject to exposure to combustibles e Locations subject to dust especially iron dust or salts e Locations subject to exposure to water oil or chemicals e Locations subject to shock or vibration Do not allow foreign objects to enter inside the product Doing so may result in fire or malfunction Do not apply any strong impact Doing so may result in damage to the product or malfunction 39 Setup and Wiring Chapter 3 N Caution Be sure to wire correctly and securely Not doing so may result in injury or damage to the product N Caution Be sure to firmly tighten the screws on the terminal block Not doing so may result in fire injury or damage to the product N Caution Carefully handle the product because it uses semiconductor elements Careless handling may result in malfunction Caution Take appropriate and sufficient countermeasures when installing systems in the fol lowing locations Not doing so may result in equipment damage e Locations subject to static electricity or other forms of noise e Locations subject to strong electromagnetic fields and magnetic fields e Locations subject to possible exposure to radioactivity e Locations close to powe
250. t Monitors U3 14 same codes as U2 01 See note See note 080E Cumulative operation time since 5th prior fault Monitors U3 15 1 hr units See note 080F Cumulative operation time since 6th prior fault Monitors U3 16 1 hr units See note 0810 Cumulative operation time since 7th prior fault Monitors U3 17 1 hr units See note 0811 140 Cumulative operation time since 8th prior fault Monitors U3 18 1 hr units See note DeviceNet Communications Card Operations Chapter 5 Register No Contents Hex Cumulative operation time since 9th prior fault Cumulative operation time since 10th prior fault Monitors U3 19 1 hr units See note Monitors U3 20 1 hr units See note 5 7 3 Parameter Reading and Writing The following tables show the SYSDRIVE 3G3PV Inverter parameter and the corresponding register numbers Write and read the various parameters with 1 as the minimum setting unit Negative num bers are expressed as two s complement If the setting unit is in hexadecimal there is no need to con vert it When writing data in parameters be sure to send an enter command to enable the written data Unless the enter command is transmitted the data will not be enabled and the Inverter may not start Parameters for Initialize Mode Parameter Register Class 64 Hex Name Setting Setting Default Changes
251. t start up due to equipment failure for example Scan List Enabled Mode and Scan List Disabled Mode A scan list must be created The scan list modes are explained below e Scan List Enabled Mode Used for Actual Operation Remote I O communications are performed according to the registered scan list and only with slaves that are on the list A verification error occurs if a slave registered on the scan list is not present on the network if a slave did not start up when remote I O communications started or is the number of I O points did not match the number registered 52 DeviceNet System Startup Chapter 4 e Scan List Disabled Mode Used When Changing the System Configuration In this mode remote I O communications fixed allocations are performed without a scan list created or with the scan list cleared This mode is used when the scan list is temporarily cleared in order to change the system configuration Do not perform actual system operation without a scan list Use this mode only to replace a Master Unit or change the system configuration change a connected Slave or node address Note 1 To enter Scan List Disabled Mode turn ON the Scan List Clear Switch during remote I O com munications with the scan list enabled with fixed allocations free allocations using the allo cated DM Area words or free allocations using the Configurator Remote I O communica tions will be executed using fixed allocations Note 2 In
252. t suit the application to simplify programming and enable effec tive usage of PC memory areas Handle Slaves with Different Response Speeds A Configurator sold separately can be used to set the communications cycle time enabling usage of Slaves with slow response times Easily Expand or Change Lines with Various Connection Methods Use a multi drop trunk line T branch multi drop lines or daisy chain drop lines All three connection methods can be combined to flexibly construct a Network that meets the needs of the application Note For connecting the DeviceNet Communications Card of the Inverter use DCA1 5C10 Thin Cables and branch them from the T branch Tap Functions and System Configuration Chapter 1 1 4 DeviceNet System Configuration 1 4 1 System Configuration Open field network DeviceNet is a multi bit multi vendor network that combines controls and data on a machine line control level Two types of communications are supported 1 Remote I O communications that automatically trans fer I O between Slaves and the CPU Unit of a SYSMAC PC without any special programming in the CPU Unit and 2 Message communications are performed between a CPU Unit to which a Master Unit is mounted and Slaves by executing specific instructions such as CMND and IOWR depending on the model of SYSMAC PC used from the program in the CPU Unit A Configurator sold separately can be used to enable following This allows the support of
253. t used 0 H5 04 041F Not used 3 H5 05 0420 Not used 1 Note 1 The values in parentheses indicate initial values when initialized in 3 wire sequence Note 2 Within the setting range 1 to 38 4 10 11 12 13 14 25 28 34 and 35 cannot be set and 29 to 31 are not used 167 DeviceNet Communications Card Operations Chapter 5 Protective Function Parameters Parameter Register Class 64 Hex Setting range Setting Default Changes No Hex unit setting during Instance Attribute operation L1 01 0480 01 9A Motor protection Oor1 1 1 No selection L1 02 0481 01 9B Motor protection time 0 1 to 5 0 0 1 min 1 0 No constant L2 01 0482 04 9C Momentary power loss 0 to 2 1 0 No selection L2 02 0483 01 9D Momentary power loss 0 0 to 2 0 0 1s 0 7 See No ridethru note 2 L2 03 0484 01 9E Minimum baseblock 0 1 to 5 0 0 15 0 5 See No time BB note 2 L2 04 0485 01 OF Voltage restart time 0 0 to 5 0 0 15 0 3 No L2 05 0486 01 AO Under voltage detection 150 to 210 150 1V 190 380 No level UV to 420 L2 06 0487 01 A1 Not used 0 0 L3 01 0488 01 A2 Stall prevention during 0 to 2 1 1 No acceleration L3 02 0489 01 A3 Stall prevention level 0 to 200 1 150 No during acceleration L3 03 048A 01 A4 Stall prevention limit 0 to 100 1 50 No duri
254. t using Configurator Product code Unique product model value Not compared Set using Configurator Connection type Applicable DeviceNet protocol Automatically set Automatically set or set using Configurator Connection path Type of Slave I O data Cannot be set Set using Configurator Note With CVM1 DRM21 V1 C200HW DRM21 V1 Master Units only node addresses allocated IN OUT sizes and allocated areas are registered in the scan list e Creating the Scan List The way that a scan list is prepared varies with the allocation method as shown below Fixed allocations With the CPU Unit in PROGRAM mode 1 Turn ON a Master Fixed Allocation Setting Switch 1 to 3 Free allocations using allocated DM Area words With the CPU Unit in PROGRAM mode turn ON the Master User Allocations Setup Switch Free allocations using Configu rator Create a list from the Configurator Obtain a list of online devices use it to create a scan list and then register the scan list in the Master Unit 2 Turn ON the Scan List Enable Switch Note 1 Be sure to create a scan list before starting actual system operation Note 2 With fixed allocations it is possible to communicate with Slaves without creating a scan list scan list disabled mode Operating without a scan list however may result in faulty opera tion because the Master Unit will communicate with Slaves even if they do no
255. ta for defining the application object for sending this object instance No data for explicit messages Consumed connection path length Indicates the number of bytes of data for the consumed connection path No data for explicit messages Consumed connection path Indicates the data for defining the application object for receiving this object instance No data for explicit messages 213 Appendix Instance 214 Attribute Content Indicates the status of this object instance 00 Does not exist in network or is not ready 01 In network state waiting for connection event from Master Unit 02 Waiting for connection ID attribute writing 03 Connection completed 04 Timeout Setting range Default Hex Must be 03 when commu nications are es tab lished Chapter 8 Instance type Indicates the type of object instance 00 Explicit message 01 Remote I O Transport class trigger Indicates the communications configuration for the DeviceNet Communications Card Produced connection ID Consumed connection ID Indicates the label used for the communications header for the DeviceNet Communications Card Note These are set when the communications connection is made Initial comm characteristics Indicates the communications configuration for the DeviceNet Communications Card
256. tances and Attributes and 5 8 3G3FV Register Numbers Classes Instances and Attributes 113 DeviceNet Communications Card Operations Chapter 5 5 6 3G3RV Register Numbers Classes Instances and Attributes 5 6 1 Inputting Control Frequency Read Write Register No Contents Hex 0000 Frequency reference S O Frequency reference 2 SE Run stop command 1 Run 0 Stop Reverse stop command 1 Reverse 0 Stop Bit 7 Not used Bit 8 External error 1 Error EFO Bit 9 Error reset 1 Reset command Bits 10 to 15 Not used 0002 Frequency reference Set units using parameter 01 03 0003 to 0005 Not used 0007 Analog output 1 setting 11 V 726 Dec to 11 V 726 Dec 0008 Analog output 2 setting 11 V 726 Dec to 11 V 726 Dec Contact output terminal M1 M2 1 ON 0 OFF Set error contact terminal MA MC output using bit 7 1 ON 0 OFF Error contact terminal MA MC 1 ON 0 OFF Bits 810 15 000A t0 000E OOOF Reference selection settings Not used PID target value register 0006H 1 Enabled 0 Disabled Bits 2 to 15 Not used Note Set all unused bits to 0 114 DeviceNet Communications Card Operations Chapter 5 5 6 2 Inverter Monitoring Functions Read Register No Contents Hex 0020 Operation 1 Operating 0 Stopped Bit 1 Reverse operation 1 Reverse operation 0 Forward operation or stopped Multi function contact output terminals M1 M2 1 ON 0
257. te 0812 Cumulative operation time since 9th prior fault Monitors U3 19 1 hr units See note 0813 Note U3 09 to U3 20 are not supported for Asian models Register No 0800 Hex to 0813 Hex are not Cumulative operation time since 10th prior fault supported for Asian models Monitors U3 20 1 hr units See note 5 6 3 Parameter Reading and Writing Chapter 5 The following tables show the SYSDRIVE 3G3RV Inverter parameters and the corresponding register numbers Write and read the various parameters with 1 as the minimum setting unit Negative num bers are expressed as two s complement If the setting unit is in hexadecimal there is no need to con vert it When writing data in parameters be sure to send an enter command to enable the written data Unless the enter command is transmitted the data will not be enabled and the Inverter may not start 120 DeviceNet Communications Card Operations Chapter 5 Parameters for Initialize Mode Parameter A1 00 Register No Hex 0100 Class 64 Hex Instance 00 Attribute Name Language selection for Digital Operator display Setting range 0to6 Setting unit Default Changes setting during operation A1 01 0101 01 Parameter access level Oto2 A1 02 0102 02 Control method selection Oto2 A1 03 0103 03 Initialize 0 to 3 330 A1 04 0104 04 Passwor
258. te 4 capacity Motor line to line 0 000 to Depends resistance 65 000 on capacity Note 1 Values in parentheses are for 400 V class Inverters Note 2 The settings of E1 11 and E1 12 are ignored if set to 0 0 Note 3 E1 13 will be the same value as E1 05 after autotuning Note 4 The setting range is 10 to 200 of the Inverter s rated output current The values for a 200 V class 0 4 kW Inverter are given above 145 DeviceNet Communications Card Operations Chapter 5 Option Parameters Parameter Register Class 64 Hex Name Setting Setting Default Change No Hex range unit setting during Instance Attribute operation F6 01 03A2 03 A2 DeviceNet fault operation Oto 3 1 1 No selection F6 02 03A3 03 A3 Communications external 0 or 1 1 0 No fault input detection method selection F6 03 03A4 03 A4 Communications external 0 to 3 1 1 No fault input operation selection F6 05 03A6 03 A6 Display unit selection for Oor 1 1 0 No current monitor External Terminal Function Parameters Parameter Register Instance Attribute Name Setting Setting Default Change No Hex range unit setting during operation H1 01 0400 04 00 Terminal S3 function 0 to 6A 1 24 No selection H1 02 0401 04 01 Terminal S4 function 0 to 6A 1 14 No selection H1 03 0402 04 02 Termin
259. tely write to and read from that register Handling data is made possible by changing function codes 86 DeviceNet Communications Card Operations Chapter 5 Handling Function code register number Processing contents Transmission completed signal Illustration for 3G3RV 4 10 hex 10 hex 03 hex 03 hex 0002 hex 0001 hex 0024 hex 002C hex Frequency reference writing X Inverter run command writing Output frequency monitoring X Inverter status reading gt PoP T E T 3 Function code response number comparison CMP 5 3 3 Parameter Register Numbers for Each Function Refer to 5 6 3G3RV Register Numbers Classes Instances and Attributes 5 7 3G3PV Register Num bers Classes Instances and Attributes and 5 8 3G3FV Register Numbers Classes Instances and Attributes 87 DeviceNet Communications Card Operations Chapter 5 5 4 Control Remote I O Operation There are four kinds of DeviceNet remote I O operation Basic remote I O standard remote I O the default setting special remote I O and control remote I O This section explains control remote I O Control remote I O enables using the functions and arrays of the Inverter control terminal I O signals The Inverter s multi function I O functions can be used during communications These operations have been developed independently and are not part of the DeviceNet standard Words Used for Control Remote I O e Outputs SYSMAC PC to Inve
260. ter Unit CVM1 or CV series PC CIO 1900 CIO 1900 Node 0 Output CIO 1901 Node 1 area To Slaves CIO 1963 CIO 1962 Node 62 CIO 1963 Node 63 CIO 2000 CIO 2000 Node 0 Input CIO 2001 Node 1 area From Slaves CIO 2063 CIO 2062 Node 62 CIO 2063 Node 63 e Allocation Areas for C200HW DRM21 V1 Master Unit CS series or C200HX HG HE PC CIO IR 50 IR 50 Node 0 IR 51 Node 1 Output ta To Slaves CIO IR 99 IR 98 Node 48 l j IR 99 Node 49 CIO IR 350 IR350 Node 0 Input IR 351 Node 1 area 1 1 From Slaves CIO IR 399 IR 398 Node 48 IR 399 Node 49 C200HS PC IR 50 IR 50 Node 0 Output IR 51 Node 1 area To Slaves IR 81 IR 80 Node 30 i l IR 81 Node 31 IR350 l IR 350 Node 0 IR 351 Node 1 Input ae From Slaves IR 381 IR 380 Node 30 IR 381 Node 31 Each node address is allocated one input and one output word starting from node 00 If a Slave requires more than one input or one output word then it is assigned more than one node address If a Slave requires less than one word it simply uses the rightmost bits in the word allocated to it Free Allocation With Allocated DM Area Words When using a CS CJ series Master Unit CS1W DRM21 CJ1W DRM21 it is possible to allocate any area to slaves using the allocated DM Area words
261. tes Set the size of the data storage area from the beginning D word Network address 0001 to 007F Hex 1 to 127 When using CMND 490 with the CS CJ Series a network address must be set for each DeviceNet Master Unit The network address is edited using the routing table edit function of a Peripheral Device except for the Programming Console C 2 C 3 Command destination node address 00 to 3F Hex 0 to 63 Node address of the Master Unit Command destination Unit address Set Master Unit FE or Master Unit s unit number 10 to 1F Hex 0 to 15 C 4 Response Communications port number 0 to 7 Set the communications port used for DeviceNet Number of retries 00 to OF Hex 0 to 15 Set the number of times to resend for error response C 5 Response monitor time 0000 Hex gt 2 s 0001 to FFFF Hex gt 0 1 to 6553 5 s unit 0 1 s Set at least 2 seconds for explicit messages Note Set 0 in word C 4 bit 15 to require a response or 1 to not require a response Responses are required for explicit messages so set 0 95 DeviceNet Communications Card Operations Chapter 5 Message Timing When executing CMND 490 an AND condition must be set that requires both the PC s Network Com munications Enabled Flag and the Master Unit s Message Communications Enabled Flag to be ON Network Communications Enabled Fla Execution condition Online status or
262. that receives input from the Slaves and the output area that writes output data to the Slaves 53 DeviceNet System Startup Chapter 4 e Allocations for CS1W DRM21 and CJ1W DRM21 Master Units Node SYSMAC CS CJ series Programmable Controllers address Fixed allocation area 1 Fixed allocation area 2 Fixed allocation area 3 Output area Input area Output area Input area Output area Input area CIO 3200 to CIO 3300 to CIO3400to CIO 3500to CIO 3600 to CIO 3700 to CIO 3263 CIO 3363 CIO 3463 CIO 3563 CIO 3663 CIO 3763 0 CIO 3200 CIO 3300 CIO 3400 CIO 3500 CIO 3600 ClO 3700 1 CIO 3201 CIO 3301 CIO 3401 CIO 3501 CIO 3601 CIO 3701 2 CIO 3202 CIO 3302 CIO 3402 CIO 3502 CIO 3602 CIO 3702 30 CIO 3230 CIO 3330 CIO 3430 CIO 3530 CIO 3630 ClO 3730 31 CIO 3231 CIO 3331 CIO 3431 CIO 3531 CIO 3631 CIO 3731 32 CIO 3232 CIO 3332 CIO 3432 CIO 3532 CIO 3632 CIO 3732 48 CIO 3248 CIO 3348 CIO 3448 CIO 3548 CIO 3648 CIO 3748 49 CIO 3249 CIO 3349 CIO 3449 CIO 3549 CIO 3649 CIO 3749 50 CIO 3250 CIO 3350 CIO 3450 CIO 3550 CIO 3650 ClO 3750 62 CIO 3262 CIO 3362 CIO 3462 CIO 3562 CIO 3662 CIO 3762 63 ClO 3263 CIO 3363 CIO 3463 CIO 3563 CIO 3663 ClO 3763 Note 1 The fixed allocation area 1 2 or 3 is selected using a software switch in the area allocated to the Master Unit Note 2 Note 3 54 The words corresponding to the node address of the Master Unit ar
263. these connectors 43 Setup and Wiring Chapter 3 e DCN1 1C T branch Tap Use for trunk line of longest drop line e DCN1 3C T branch Tap Use for trunk line of longest drop line e T branch Tap Connectors The required number of connectors on cable side for T branch Taps are supplied with the product Name COMBICON Plug with Screw Flange Model MSTBP 2515 STF 5 08 AB AU SO Manufacturer Phoenix Contact Align the cable connector with the socket on the T branch Tap as shown in the following diagram and fully insert the connector into the socket Tighten the set screws to secure the connection Tighten the screws to a torque of 0 3 N m Note To avoid damaging the cable or breaking wires do not pull on the cable or bend it too sharply when connecting it to the T branch Tap Also never place heavy objects on top of the cable 44 Setup and Wiring Chapter 3 Connecting Terminating Resistors Terminating resistors must be connected at each end of the trunk line Use the methods described here to connect the Terminating Resistors e T branch Tap Terminating Resistor A Terminating Resistor is included with the T branch Tap Insert the Terminating Resistor into the T branch Tap as shown in the following diagram The Terminating Resistor can face in either direction e Terminal block Terminating Resistor A
264. tify objects identification information Class 01 hex e Message router objects Class 02 hex e DeviceNet objects Class 03 hex e Assembly objects Class 04 hex e DeviceNet connection objects Class 05 hex e Motor data objects Class 28 e Control supervisor objects Class 29 hex e AC DC drive objects Class 2A hex The three types of objects related to Inverters are the motor data control supervisor and AC DC drive objects These are explained below and in subsequent sections The other types of objects are used less frequently and covered in 8 2 Objects Motor data objects are data and functions related to motors connected to Inverters The motors that can be connected to Inverters are squirrel cage inductive motors so the Motor Type is always 7 The motor s rated current and rated voltage can be set and read Support Service Code Service Gode No Hey Sewe 0E Get attribute single 10 Set attribute single 105 DeviceNet Communications Card Operations Object Details Instance Attribute Object Software Revision Content Indicates class 28 software revisions The revision value is advanced whenever there is a change Setting range Default Motor Type Indicates the type of motor to be used The setting for a squirrel cage inductive motor is 7 Motor Rated Current The motor s rated current can be set and read The setting unit is 0 1 A The setting unit can be
265. tion b5 12 01BO 01 BO Selection of PID Oto2 1 0 No feedback command loss detection b5 13 01B1 01 B1 PID feedback command 0 to 100 1 0 No loss detection level b5 14 01B2 01 B2 PID feedback command 0 0 to 25 5 0 18s 1 0 No loss detection time b5 15 01B3 01 B3 PID sleep function 0 0 to 0 1 Hz 0 0 No operation level 400 0 b5 16 01B4 01 B4 PID sleep operation 0 0 to 25 5 0 18s 0 0 No delay time b5 17 01B5 01 B5 Accel decel time for PID 0 0 to 25 5 O0 1s 0 0 No reference b5 18 01DC 01 DC PID set point selection Oor1 1 0 No See note 5 b5 19 01DD 01 DD PID set point See note 0 0 to 0 1 0 0 No 5 100 0 b6 01 01B6 01 B6 Dwell frequency at start 0 0 to 0 1 Hz 0 0 No 400 0 b6 02 01B7 01 B7 Dwell time at start 0 0 to 10 0 0 18s 0 0 No b6 03 01B8 01 B8 Dwell frequency at stop 0 0 to 0 1 Hz 0 0 No 400 0 b6 04 01B9 01 B9 Dwell time at stop 0 0 to 10 0 O0 1s 0 0 No b8 01 01CC 01 CC Energy saving mode Oor1 1 No selection b8 02 01CD 01 CD Energy saving gain 0 0to 10 0 0 1 0 7 See Yes note 2 b8 03 01CE 01 CE Energy saving filter time 0 00 to 0 01 s 0 50 See Yes constant 10 0 note 3 122 DeviceNet Communications Card Operations Parameter Register No Hex Class 64 Hex Instance Attribute Energy saving coefficient Setting range 0 00 to 655 00 See note 4 Chapter 5 Default setting Depends on capacity Change during operation Power detection filter time constant 0 to 2000 2
266. tive value as its 2 s complement Reference From 00 Operate at B1 01 setting Net 01 Set B1 01 to 3 and operate with DeviceNet Note 1 The Net Reference and Reference From Net functions cannot be changed during running Note 2 Under the DeviceNet protocol the unit for the speed reference is always r min The number of motor poles 2 to 39 must be set in parameter 01 03 frequency reference setting and display units when using DeviceNet open network Note 3 Cannot be changed during running e Communications Data Setting Examples Example 1 Finding the communications data for outputting a frequency of 60 Hz with the following conditions set Number of poles 01 03 4 Speed scale attribute 16 0 e Converting frequency to rotational speed Frequency x 120 number of poles 60 x 120 4 1 800 r min e Converting rotational speed to minimum unit Rotational speed unit 1 800 1 r min x 1 2 1 800 e Converting communications data to hexadecimal 1 800 dec 708 hex Example 2 Finding the communications data for outputting a frequency of 60 Hz with the following condition set Frequency setting 01 03 0 Cannot be set with DeviceNet protocol e Converting frequency to minimum setting unit Frequency minimum unit 60 0 01 6 000 e Converting communications data to hexadecimal 6 000 dec 1 770 hex Note With frequency the speed scale has no effect 11
267. to 100 1 10 No d6 01 02A0 02 AO Field weakening level 0 to 100 1 80 No d6 02 02A1 02 Al Field frequency 0 0 to 0 1 Hz 0 0 No 400 0 Note Values exceeding the max output frequency E1 04 and E3 02 cannot be set Set the motor con stant parameters first Motor Constant Parameters Parameter Register No Hex Class 64 Hex Instance Attribute Setting range Setting unit Default setting Change during operation Input voltage setting 155 to 255 1V 200 400 155 to See note 510 See 1 note 1 E1 03 0302 03 02 V f pattern selection OtoF 1 F No E1 04 0303 03 03 Max output frequency 40 0 to 0 1 Hz 50 0 60 0 No 400 0 See See note note 5 8 125 DeviceNet Communications Card Operations Chapter 5 Parameter Register Class 64 Hex Name Setting Setting Default Change No Hex range unit setting during Instance Attribute operation E1 05 0304 03 04 Max voltage 0 0 to 0 1 V 200 0 No 255 0 0 0 400 0 to 510 0 See note See note 1 1 E1 06 0305 03 05 Base frequency 0 0 to 0 1 Hz 50 0 60 0 No 400 0 See note 8 E1 07 0306 03 06 Mid output frequency 0 0 to 0 1 Hz 3 0 No 400 0 E1 08 0307 03 07 Mid output frequency 0 0 to 0 1 V 15 0 30 0 No voltage 255 0 0 0 See note to 510 0 1 and 3 See note 1 E
268. truction 2 When the Message Communications Enabled Flag is turned ON the completion code D03001 will be examined If an error is found the error code will be stored in D00100 and re send message If normally completed the fault code will be stored in D00200 and the Message Sent Flag will be turned ON and the Sending Message Flag will be turned OFF 3 When the Reset Input Bit is turned ON bit 2 of word n Fault Reset Input Bit will turn ON When the fault is cleared the Fault Flag will turn OFF Network Configuration This program is based on the following conditions Master unit number 0 Master node address 63 Fixed allocation area setting 1 Network Communications Enabled Flag A20200 Online Flag 151100 Network Communications Error Flag A21900 184 Communications Programs sysMAC Cs series PCs Chapter 7 Ladder Program Fault Wd m bit 00 Fault Wd m bit 00 002001 DIFU G13 003001 003001 003000 ERN 003000 000100 Fault reset 003001 _ Wd n bit 02 oy Fault Flag MOV 021 0000 Dd0300 MOVD 083 D00000 0210 D00300 Sets the node address of the Slave for reading 002001 ORW 035 D90300 000E Do0400 BSET 071 0000 bosao0 D03009 Clears the storage area and sets 1 in word 0000 used
269. tting during operation H4 07 0423 04 23 Analog output 1 signal Oor2 1 0 No level selection H4 08 0424 04 24 Analog output 2 signal Oor2 1 0 No level selection H5 01 0425 04 25 Slave address 0 to 20 1 1F No See note 2 H5 02 0426 04 26 Communication speed Oto4 1 3 No selection H5 03 0427 04 27 Communication parity Oto2 1 0 No selection H5 04 0428 04 28 Stopping method after Oto3 1 3 No communication error H5 05 0429 04 29 Communication error Oor1 1 1 No detection selection H5 06 042A 04 2A Send wait time 5 to 65 1ms 5 No H5 07 042B 04 2B RTS control ON OFF Oor1 1 1 No Note 1 The values in parentheses indicate initial values when initialized in 3 wire sequence Note 2 Set H5 01 to 0 to disable Inverter responses to RS 422A 485 communications Protective Function Parameters Parameter Register Class 64 Hex Name Setting Setting Default Change No Hex range unit setting during Instance Attribute operation L1 01 0480 04 80 Motor protection Oor1 1 1 No selection L1 02 0481 04 81 Motor protection time 0 1 to 5 0 0 1 min 1 0 No constant L1 03 0482 04 82 Alarm operation selection 0 to 3 1 3 No during motor overheating L1 04 0483 04 83 Motor overheating O0to2 1 1 No operation selection L1 05 0484 04 84 Motor temperature input 0 00 to 0 01 s 0 20 No filter time constant 10 00 L2 01 0485 04 85 Momentary power loss Oto2 1 0 No detection L2 02 0486 04 86 Momentary power loss
270. uct serial Depends number of the DeviceNet on Communications Card product 60000000 hex onwards Product Number Indicates product model Number number shown at 3G3FV PDRT1 SIN 3G3RV te PDRT1 SIN 3G3PV PDRT 1 SIN Indicates Inverter status e 3 hex Inverter ready e Status Details Content Connection 0 Not connected 1 Master Slave connected Not used Configuration 0 Data never changed 1 Data other than default Not used Note Bits that are not used are all zeros 8 2 2 Message Router Objects Class 02 Hex Message router objects have the function of distributing DeviceNet communications data Message and remote I O operations and so on must pass through these objects to be distributed Message rout er objects themselves are involved in internal processing only and do not have data to be exchanged externally 208 Appendix Chapter 8 Support Service Code Service Code No Hex Get attribute single Object Details Content Setting Default Read range Hex 01 Object Software Indicates class 02 software 0001 Yes Word Revision revisions The revision value is advanced whenever there is a change 8 2 3 DeviceNet Objects Class 03 Hex DeviceNet objects are objects related to DeviceNet communications information and operations Support Service Code Service Code No Hex OE Get attribute single 10 Set attribute
271. val system or transmitted in any form or by any means mechanical electronic photocopying recording or otherwise without the prior written permission of OMRON No patent liability is assumed with respect to the use of the information contained herein Moreover because OMRON is constantly striving to improve its high quality products the information contained in this manual is subject to change without notice Every precaution has been taken in the preparation of this manual Never theless OMRON assumes no responsibility for errors or omissions Neither is any liability assumed for dam ages resulting from the use of the information contained in this publication iii TABLE OF CONTENTS CHAPTER 1 Functions and System Configuration p Ved FUMCHONS oss ses espeets siesta oei aa ease tae ar a a ee ata AE iS 2 122 IN W FUNCHONS perae re aruer Sot aa ae nr e bp od Steeles Leste ex 5 1 3 DeviceNet Features oorares ieri o Bick tte Mes etd EERE A ees ey eee 6 1 4 DeviceNet System Configuration 0 0 cee eee ee ene 8 1 4 1 System Configuration 0 0 cee eee 8 1 4 2 Configurator Overview 0 eee ee eee eee 9 1 4 3 DeviceNet Communications Specifications 0 00000 00 2 eee 11 EAA INV ERteP ccc treet Bn Se OS BETO RAw Shs LoTR SEG RR aa eS 11 CHAPTER 2 DeviceNet Communications Line Design 17 2 1 Network Configuration Overview 0 0 ccc cee eee eee
272. verse Run 003000 Fault Flag 000003 Fault Reset Input Bit n e S e Le Operation 1 When the Frequency Reference Input Bit turns ON the rotational speed reference data specified in D00000 is moved to remote I O output word n 1 2 When the Forward Input Bit turns ON remote I O word n bit 0 Forward Stop will turn ON and for ward operation will start During forward operation remote I O word m bit 2 During Forward Run will be ON 3 When the Forward Input Bit turns OFF remote I O word m bit 2 During Forward Run will turn OFF after operation will decelerate to a stop 4 When the Reverse Input Bit turns ON remote I O word n bit 1 Reverse Stop will turn ON and re verse operation will start During reverse operation remote I O word m bit 3 During Reverse Run will be ON 5 When the Reverse Input Bit turns OFF remote I O word m bit 3 During Reverse Run will turn OFF after operation decelerates to a stop 6 When the remote I O Fault Bit word m bit 0 turns ON the Fault Flag will turn ON 7 When the Fault Reset Input Bit turns ON remote I O word n bit 2 Fault Reset Input Bit will turn ON and the fault will be cleared When the fault is reset the Fault Flag will turn OFF simultaneously 181 Communications Programs SYSMAC Cs series PCs Chapter 7 Ladder Program 001000 DIFU 013 001001 DIFD 014 001002 During forward run During reverse run 001001 word m bit 2
273. vice code and that cannot be changed attribute values and send the data again 13FF There is insufficient data to execute the service Correct the data size and send the data again 14FF The attribute for the service does not exist Check and correct the service code and attribute values and send the data again 15FF These is too much data to execute the service Correct the data size and send the data again 16FF The specified object does not exist Check and correct the class and instance values and send the data again 20FF The parameters are invalid or the data is Check and correct the data setting range send outside the range for the requested service the data again 1FFF Manufacturer fault code Stop the Inverter and send the data again Check and correct the data setting range send the data again 175 Communications Errors Chapter 6 6 3 Special Remote I O Errors Special Remote I O Errors If each function is not set properly using the special remote I O the MSB of the function code will be changed to 1 and one of the following error codes will be returned Check the meaning of the error mes sage and either correct the message or adjust the timing of the message Error Code Meaning Normal operation response When sending data the code will be returned with the function code and register number followed by the amount of data being written or read data Function code error A function code that is
274. viceNet DeviceNet Fault mode See note 2 02 Maker s specifications Force Fault Trip Communications external fault input 00 Normal operation 01 Communications external fault input according to parameter F9 Force Status Communications external fault input status 00 Normal status 01 Communications external fault detected Inverter stopped with fault detection Chapter 5 Note 1 The Net Control and Control From Net functions cannot be changed during running Note 2 A DeviceNet Fault mode cannot be set from communications Use the Inverter s parameters 107 DeviceNet Communications Card Operations Chapter 5 e Fault Codes DeviceNet error code Operator display Meaning 0000 Inverter normal 2120 GF Ground fault 2130 SC Short circuit 2200 OL2 Inverter overload 2220 OL1 Motor overload 2221 OL3 Overtorque detection 1 2222 OL4 Overtorque detection 2 2300 OC Overcurrent 3130 PF Input phase loss LF Output phase loss 3210 OV Main circuit overvoltage 3220 UV1 Undervoltage main 3222 UV3 Undervoltage MC 4200 OH Overheat 4210 OH1 Overheat 5110 UV2 Control power supply fault 5120 PUF Fuse open 5300 OPR Operator disconnection 6320 ERR EEPROM write failure 7110 RR Braking transistor failure 7112 RH Braking resistor overheating 7301 PGO PG is disc
275. without the decimal point Set the position of the digit where the decimal point is to be displayed starting from the rightmost digit Example To display the maximum frequency as 200 0 specify 12000 71 DeviceNet System Startup Chapter 4 4 3 Startup Procedure The communications system can be started from any of the nodes on the Network The following proce dure gives the startup process after turning ON the power to the Inverter s DeviceNet Communications Card If the startup process shown below is interrupted or stops before being completed an error will occur Correct errors that occur referring to Chapter 6 Communications Errors Turn ON the power The PWR indicator will turn ON Power is being supplied The MS indicator will be lit red and then green Confirming MS indicator status The NS indicator will be lit red and then green Confirming MS indicator status The MS indicator will flash Shows Optional Card startup processing status The MS indicator will be lit The Optional Card is ready The NS indicator will flash The Optional Card is connected to the Network and startup processing is being performed 8 The NS indicator will be lit The Network is started NO TO fF WYP 72 MNI LLI 1 Chapter 5 DeviceNet Communications Card Operations 5 1 5 2 5 3 5 4 5 5 5 6 5 7 5 8 Remote I O Switching Remote I O Operation Special Remote
Download Pdf Manuals
Related Search
Related Contents
Frigidaire FPEC3685KS Wiring diagram Operating Instructions Copyright © All rights reserved.
Failed to retrieve file